Home

Paperless Recorder User's Manual - pma

1. Unit mm Power terminals a N ta ope Srg I i T pa Option terminal block me T B 7 g H H B E JED a D D Measurement input oa terminal blocks Dimensions before the mounting bracket is attached 151 5 M 144 7 23 4 175 _ 58 4 T Thickness of the attachment panel 2 to 26 oy rl p E j M E 0 l it 5 8 e s 3 S BS o Ly l wl N Dimensions after the mounting bracket is attached The dimensional tolerance is 3 unless otherwise specified However the tolerance for dimensions less than 10 mm is 0 3 mm Note When mounting to a panel use two brackets one each of the top and bottom of this instrument or on the left and right sides suonesoads 12 17 Appendix Appendix 1 Time Estimate for Writing Display Event Data to the Internal Memory This section describes the number of data
2. Dimensions before the mounting bracket is attached 151 5 144 23 4 175 58 4 L __ Thickness of the attachment panel t 2 to 26 D 1 I IT l aD HO E i C mw O A P tg 2 i S l L Ey L io N Dimensions after the mounting bracket is attached The dimensional tolerance is 3 unless otherwise specified However the tolerance for dimensions less than 10 mm is 0 3 mm Note For recorders which are side by side mounted vertically when a front panel is opened the down arrow key may interfere the upper front panel 2 4 2 3 Measurement Input Terminal Wiring General Precautions When Wiring the Measurement Input Signal Wires A WARNING _ e To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF AN CAUTION e Ifa large pulling force is applied to the input output signal wires connected to this instrument the terminal or signal wire may become damaged To prevent this from happening fix all the wiring cords to the rear of the installation panel e Do not apply a voltage exceeding the following value to the input terminals Otherwise damage to the unit may result e Maximum input voltage Voltage range less than or equal to 200 mVDC TC RTD and DI 10 VDC Other DC voltage ranges 60 VDC e Maximum common mode voltage 60 VDC
3. E e mail transmission function ICON sssesseseseereererreerenee 1 16 e mail transmission OG rsispas 9 9 eject button ejecting the external storage medium seess 3 19 Enter Setup eeens bera D Ae A 9 6 entering CHALACIENS cecscevacdssevectsivcesveeescicvecrecivevenesrrestexedese 3 9 entering VAIUCS Wiisccccesscessecsescssssecasesseesesctssvesecs cxsssenvsensveeeecees 3 8 CMON OG i see ces seri EE EEATT sevteneeens 9 8 error messages 10 1 ESG MO cee cas taeddeccncep cet exes den teence avast rateeeecaacsenaesenescecuea sans 3 1 EV GM E A AE E A tose 7 2 event data 1 28 1 30 EXPAN sevcestcaveietineeeeevens nar 6 23 expanding reducing the time axis 0 0 eee eeeeeees 5 9 expendable parts ee 11 4 exponent 1 42 EI EE ET ET T 7 3 extemal GUIMENSIONS cs cccvceicasceecseezeedcceavesicuscensteedscensteesbersctne 2 4 external storage medium ICON eee eee eter eeeeeeee 1 16 external trigger et external trigger for event data remote control 0 1 52 ooo fall OULPUL issiria 1 50 fifo MOTO seccscccscccscseessececs cosseseucans seas ticessaesnevecenasstcssensscteses 7 4 file format SMAPSNOT sssr cc csesseessteetsesessesseeeseesteeseneens 7 15 file header file name snapshot ssssessserssssserreserresesernsreserisrnaranneenne filter senos ridadas a aaa firmware version number floppy CISK GIVE siostre Format TIME sparre ner te necsectscisevteserseceneetavasbees formatting the
4. 1 7 FAIL Memory End Output Function F1 option FAIL Output When a failure occurs in the CPU of this instrument the relay contact signal 1 signal is output The relay is energized when the CPU is normal it is de energized when a CPU failure occurs de energized on failure Therefore relay output is carried out even when the power is turned OFF even during a power failure see figure below You cannot change this behavior e Relay Behavior De energized on failure NE LA LIAZ NO Cc NC NO Cc NC NO Cc NC Normal Failure Power off NO normally opened C common NC normally closed 1 50 1 7 FAIL Memory End Output Function F1 option Memory End Output If little free space remains in the internal memory or external medium and the following conditions apply a single relay output signal is output This relay signal is energized The operation cannot be changed For Models with an External Storage Drive e For both manual save and auto save When saving displayed data When the remaining time for saving the displayed data to the internal memory is less than a specified time the memory alarm time the relay is energized The memory alarm time can be set from 1 to 100 hours or Off e When saving event data When in the mode in which data is always saved to the internal memory Free mode and the remaining time for saving the event data is less than the specified time the memory alarm time the relay is
5. 1div Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed Information Description All channel display Waveforms of all channels that were set to display the trend are displayed on one trend screen Displayed color of waveforms The displayed color of waveforms can be specified for each channel The color also applies to the bar graph Thickness of waveform lines You can select from 1 2 or 3 dots The specified thickness of waveform lines applies to all channels Trip line display Displays a line to indicate a particular value of interest trip line for each group You can select the thickness of the displayed line from 1 2 or 3 dots Up to four trip lines can be displayed on a single group Scale display A scale appropriate for the measured item can be displayed for each channel You can select whether or not to display the scale for each channel Grid The specified number of lines are displayed on the waveform display area Turn ON OFF the numerical The numerical display section can be turned ON or OFF display section If the numerical display section is turned OFF the display shows only the waveform and the scale suoloun jo uoneuejdxg a 1 4 Display Function Updating the Waveform One division along the time axis consists of 30 dots on the LCD The displayed waveform is updated at an interval corresponding to one dot This interval is determined by the time perio
6. Buffer data at the Buffer data at the Buffer data at the nth sampling n 1th sampling n 2th sampling New data New data This instrument uses an A D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital signal By setting the integration time to match the time period corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle the power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated The integration time of the A D converter is selected from the table below Model Integration Time of the A D Converter 3 ch model Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz or Auto 6 ch and 12 ch model Select 16 7 ms 60 Hz 20 ms 50 Hz 100 ms or Auto e If Auto is selected this instrument will automatically detect the power supply frequency and select 16 7 ms or 20 ms Fixed to 20 ms on P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply e Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16 7 ms and 20 ms this setting can be used to eliminate the power frequency noise for either frequency 50 Hz or 60 Hz However when the integration time is 100 ms the scan interval is fixed to 2 s 1 6 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Pulse Input PM1 Option Contact or open collector signal pulses are input to the dedicated input terminals Three inputs are available However the instrument can be expanded for up to 8 inputs e Pulses of 100 Hz or less whose Low closed and High open pulse widths are both 5
7. AUTO SCROLL ON Automatically switches the displayed groups see Explanation AUTO SCROLL OFF Cancels the auto switching of the displayed 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Starting the Waveform Display Stopping the Waveform Update The operation to start the Waveform Display and stop updating the waveform is the same as the operation to start stop data acquisition When the data acquisition is started waveforms are displayed when the data acquisition is stopped waveforms are not updated For the operating procedure see section 7 2 Writing Messages For the operating procedure see section 6 4 Changing the Displayed Group Using the Arrow Keys Press the right arrow key while displaying the trend digital or bar graph screen to rotate the displayed group from group 1 to group 4 Press the left arrow key to rotate the displayed group in reverse order Explanation Group Display All Channel Display In group display the waveforms of channels that are assigned to the group are displayed In all channel display the waveforms of all channels that are set to display the trend are displayed on the current group display Turning ON OFF the Scale Display Turning ON OFF the Numerical Display Section You can show or hide the scale and or numerical display section su 1 9 5 uone do y uo suoado K 5 1 Displaying Measured Data in Wa
8. WH 2 bytes binary data App 1 xipueddy 3 Appendix 1 Time Estimate for Writing Display Event Data to the Internal Memory Internal Memory Capacity The capacity of the internal memory that is used for data storage is 1 2 MB The internal memory is allocated depending on the acquired data as follows Data being acquired Internal Memory Capacity Display data only 1 2 MB Display data and event data Display data 0 9 MB Event data 0 3 MB Event data only 1 2 MB Maximum Sampling Length The maximum sampling length is the time duration that the data storage area in the internal memory becomes full The maximum sampling length can be derived from the following equation Maximum sampling length maximum number of data points per channel x sampling interval e Maximum number of data points per channel that can be acquired When the type of data to be written to the internal memory and the number of measurement and computation channels are decided the maximum number of data that can be written is calculated This is called the maximum number of data points per channel hereafter max data no The max data no is calculated using the equation in the table below Data being acquired Max data no Display data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the max data no is 100 000 Display data and event data e D
9. Al PNL 2003 09 25 14 37 AEZ PNL 2003 09 25 14 37 B 1 PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 Alg2 PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 AIE PNL 2003 10 04 09 03 A3 PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 AE PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 EE Input e Loading setup data Loads only the setup data of setting mode MENU key switch to setting mode 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data gt 2 soft key select Load settings From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following display Load settings File name Time PNL 2003 09 25 PNL 2003 09 25 PNL 2003 09 25 PNL 2003 09 25 PNL 2003 10 04 PNL 2003 09 25 PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 Note If you attempt to load the setup data and the external storage medium does not contain the setup data a message There is no setting file appears Operations on the Display e Saving setup data 1 Enter the file name in the File name box up to eight alphanumeric characters 2 Press the DISP ENTER key The setup data is saved to the external storage medium The saved file is displayed in the file list section on the right side If the file with the same name exists on the external storage medium a message confirming file overwrite appears To overwrite the file select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu 7 21 suoljeiodoQ peo eres ead 7 9 Saving and Loading Setup Data e Loading setup data of
10. cccecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeneeeeeeeneeeeas 8 7 8 4 Setting the Timer for Statistical Computations TLOG Computation and Data Save TEOG Dat eh rarr E E E cease seers eee 8 9 8 5 Setting the Rolling Average recentni siina ranieri ni otata ERRES 8 12 86 Creating REPOMS iiic isctt iii dad eroaa a aa a e EA aa eE Ee Aar EECa 8 14 Operations of Other Functions 9 1 Assigning an Action to the USER Key and Using the USER Key ssssssssssesesrereeee 9 1 9 2 Disabling Certain Keys Keylock FUNCTION ecceeeeceeseeeeeteeeeeeaeeeaeeteneeeseeseateteeeeaeenaes 9 2 g3 Using Key Login Logout FUMGHON srren iaai aaa 9 5 9 4 Displaying a List of Record of Errors and Operations Displaying Logs ceeeee 9 8 9 5 Monitoring the Remaining Space in the Internal Memory and Outputting Alarms W OPUN N ta cee rerrrcr a renter creer ence ents 9 10 9 6 Setting the Remote Control Function R PM Option 0 0 eeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 9 11 Contents Chapter 10 Troubleshooting WOT SA EIStHOT MOSSAGOS iissa asein saceie cence esnventes cehecaddhennpsdzeesteteedaaes 10 1 10 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chat cccecs sce eseesccsessetees ence eceh cessnnedeeeseedunesthes na aerias 10 9 Chapter 11 Maintenance Chapter 12 Specifications Appendix 1121 POnOGICAMSPOCOM sc ccczssecvaiecscssesetdeseccagaatecenzaeats vote iaantnecdteneoaiezinaianiad neteenaatspesteneetetesaaers 11 1 Wt 22 Calibration 2ieci ver
11. 10 10 Chapter 11 Maintenance 11 1 Periodic Inspection Check the operation of this instrument periodically to keep it in good working order Conduct the following inspections and replace worn parts as necessary e Is the display and storage functioning properly In the event of problems see section 10 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated If replacement is necessary see section 11 3 Replacement of Parts Jueu zuleN 11 2 Calibration It is recommended that this instrument be calibrated once a year to assure its measurement accuracy For details regarding calibration contact your nearest dealer Required Instruments A calibration instrument with an appropriate resolution is required for calibrating this instrument Recommended Instrument e DC voltage standard FLUKE Model 5520 or equivalent Main specifications Output Accuracy 0 005 1 uV e Decade resistance box M amp C Model 2793 01 or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy for the output range of 0 1 to 500 Q 0 01 2 mQ Resolution 0 001 Q 0 C standard temperature device Model ZC 114 ZA 10 from Coper Electronics Co Ltd or equivalent Main specifications Accuracy of stability of the standard temperature 0 05 C For information on purchasing the calibration instruments contact your nearest dealer Calibration Procedure 1 Wire this instrument and the calibration inst
12. Display data 2 times the trend display to 1 60 minimum Event data Reduction only up to 1 60 minimum The minimum magnification and the factor by which the display can be expanded or reduced with one operation vary depending on the display update rate for the display data and on the sampling interval for the event data To expand or reduce the display further repeat the procedures SUdaINS uone do y UO SUOI E1BdO jo 5 4 Displaying Measured Data Previously Acquired Historical Trend Memory Information Information of the Data That is Being Displayed The following information is listed When the key login logout When the key login logout function is disabled 185 183 57 181 54kPa 19 198 91 181 48kPa File Name Data Kind Memory indicates that the data is in the internal memory A file name is displayed if the data is recalled from the external storage medium Data Kind is either DISP display data or EVENT event data Serial No Serial number of this instrument used to acquire data Note When displaying measured data from the external storage medium the displayed serial number is that of this instrument used to acquire the data Background Color of the Historical Trend The background color of the historical trend is either black or white opposite of the background color displayed for the current trend 5 10 Chapter 6 Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents 6 1 Change the Gro
13. Haximam of 48 character can be entered Haximum of 48 character can be entered 123456789 C KCD 47 SOR ABS LOG EXRC EQ SNES FECTS ST KRGEN LUES AND NOT XOR OR TLOG AVEC MAX HING SUN P P lt Ins soft key Switches between insert and overwrite DEJ Overwrites the cursor position Bs soft key HSH inserts at the cursor position Deletes the character before the cursor position Del soft key Deletes the character at the cursor position M1 M2 soft key Switches between number input and computing element input 2 Enter the equation using the soft keys and arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key The input equation is displayed in the Calculation expression box e Span_Lower Span_Upper Unit 1 With the cursor blue at the Span Lower Span Upper and Unit boxes press the Input soft key 2 Enter the values using the soft keys and arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key The input value or character string is displayed in the Span Lower Span Upper or Unit box e Constant Number Value 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Number under Constant A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key to select a constant you wish to change from K01 to K30 The cursor blue moves to Value 3 Press the Input soft key A pop up window appears 4 Enter the constant using the soft keys and arrow keys 5 Press the DISP ENTER key The input
14. Opening the Operation Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 8 soft key select Load Initialize From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display After carrying out the steps above select the one of the following soft keys according to your needs The display that appears are similar to those shown in setting mode e Deleting files 3 soft key select Delete e Formatting the external storage medium 4 soft key select format Operations on the Display e Deleting files or directories See Deleting files or directories on page 7 18 e Formatting the external storage medium See Formatting the external storage medium on page 7 18 Formatting the External Storage Medium e Type See Setup Items on page 7 18 7 19 suoljeiedo peo anes ed 7 8 Clearing the Data in the Internal Memory This section explains how to clear all the data in the internal memory including display data event data manual sample data TLOG data M1 PM1 option and report data M1 PM1 option To clear the log information in addition to the above data perform the procedure for clearing the internal memory in basic setting mode see section 3 5 Clearing the Data in the Internal Memory lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Operation Dialog Box MENU key switch to setting mode gt 7 soft key select Save Load Clear
15. System Errors Servicing is required when a system error occurs Contact your nearest dealer for repairs Code Message 901 ROM failure 902 RAM failure 910 A D memory failure for all input channels 921 A D calibration error 930 Memory acquisition failure 940 The ethernet module is down 10 8 10 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart When Nothing Operates Nothing Is Displayed Is the power supply properly connected Connect it properly See section 2 4 Supply power of the voltage frequency according to the specifications Is the power supplied properly Contact your nearest dealer When Problems Exist on the Display or Other Functions See section 2 4 Move the input and communication wires away from the noise source Ground this instrument Use shielded cables for input and communication wires Insert a isolation transformer in the power line Insert a power line filter in the power line If an inductive load is used in the alarm output line insert a serge Contact your nearest dealer suppressor in the line Are taking measures against noise 10 9 Bunooyseaqnol g 10 2 Troubleshooting Flow Chart Measurement Related Problems In the following cases e The reading error is large e The trend or digital value fluctuates The trend is off the scale on either the 0 or 100 side Does the input meet the NO
16. cJ c c L ING No NO N N BG FAIL Memory end FAIL Memory end output F1 Alarm output A2 Pulse input PM1 04 03 02 01 8 7 6 Remote input PM1 With A2 NO Jaded ee J OO No NO OG r OS r A NC normally closed C common NO normally opened Relay contact output terminal 1 to 8 C common Remote input terminal H L Pulse input terminals The alarm output terminals 01 to 06 are indicated using 101 to l06 in the alarm output settings The remote input terminals 1 to 8 are indicated using numbers 1 to 8 in the remote output settings The pulse input terminals 6 to 8 are indicated using numbers 6 to 8 in the pulse input settings 2 10 2 4 Optional Input Output Terminal Wiring Alarm Output FAIL Memory End Output Wiring Use crimp on lugs with isolation sleeves for 4 mm screws when connecting the input output signal wires to the terminals Crimp on lug with isolation sleeve A for 4 mm screw 0 Relay contact output e7 9 E Relay Output Specifications Output format Relay contact Contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A or 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load Dielectric strength 1600 VAC 50 60 Hz for 1 minute between the input terminal and earth Remote Input Pulse Input Wiring Use crimp on lugs with isolation sleeves for 4 mm screws when connecting the input output signal wires to the terminals Crimp on lug with isolation sle
17. A 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The action is executed and this instrument returns to the operation mode To cancel the action and return to the operation mode select No using the arrow keys and press the DISP ENTER key Setup Items Clearing the Internal Memory e Select the type of action from the following Clear1 Initializes the setup data of basic setting mode and setting mode and clears the data in the internal memory Clear2 Initializes the setup data of setting mode and clears the data in the internal memory Clear3 Clears the data in the internal memory e Data That Are Cleared Items that are cleared are display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data M1 PM1 option report data M1 PM1 option and log information 3 14 3 6 Changing the Displayed Language This section explains how to change the language used on the display Displayed Language lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 5 soft key select Aux Time zone From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Mode AUX Tag Channel Channel Memory alarm lh Language Partial Not Time zone Difference from GMT 4 Hedia FIFO Off English Japanese German French Next 1 2 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Langu
18. Color 6 Hath Zone Graph 1 2 3 4 lt 1 Group set Trip line gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Group number 1to4 1 Group set gt Group name Up to 16 alphanumeric characters GROUP 1 Group set gt CH set 01 to 12 31 to 42 computation channels 01 03 01 06 or 07 12 Group set gt Trip line gt No 1 to No 4 On Off Off Group set gt Trip line gt Position Group set gt Trip line gt Color 0 to 100 Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray lime cyan dark blue yellow light gray or purple 100 No 1 Red No 2 Green No 3 Blue No 4 Yellow 1 M1 or PM1 option lt 2 Color gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Color gt CH1 Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue Red violet gray lime cyan dark blue yellow light gray or purple Color gt CH2 Same as above Green Color gt CH3 Same as above Blue Color gt CH4 Same as above Blue violet Color gt CH5 Same as above Brown Color gt CH6 Same as above Orange Color gt CH7 Same as above yellow green Color gt CH8 Same as above light blue Color gt CH9 Same as above violet Color gt CH10 Same as above gray Color gt CH11 Same as above lime Color gt CH12 Same as above cyan App 28 Appendix 6 List of Parameters lt 3 Zone Graph Partial gt Parameter Selectab
19. DI digital input DC current with external shunt resistor attached Type Range Measurement Range DCV 20mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50V 50 00 to 50 00 V TC R 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F S 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F B 0 0 to 1820 0 C 32 to 3308 F K 200 0 to 1370 0 C 328 to 2498 F E 200 0 to 800 0 C 328 0 to 1472 0 F J 200 0 to 1100 0 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F T 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F N 0 0 to 1300 0 C 32 to 2372 F w 0 0 to 2315 0 C 32 to 4199 F E 200 0 to 900 0 C 328 0 to 1652 0 F Us 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F WRe 0 0 to 2400 0 C 32 to 4352 F RTD PT Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C 328 0 to 1112 0 F JPT JPt100 4 200 0 to 550 0 C 328 0 to 1022 0 F DI Level 0 Less than 2 4 V 1 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V Cont 0 Open 1 Closed 1_R S B K E J T N IEC584 1 1995 DIN IEC584 JIS C1602 1995 2 W W 5 Rd W 26 Rd Hoskins Mfg Co ASTM E988 3 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN43710 4 Pt100 JIS C1604 1997 IEC751 1995 DIN IEC751 1996 JPt100 JIS C1604 1989 JIS C1606 1989 Measuring current i 1 mA Pt100 JPt100 Input Floating unbalanced input Isolated between channels however b terminals for RTD input are common Thermocouple burnout Burnout upscale downscale function can be swi
20. First CH Last CH Set the target channel common with the Zone and Graph settings Measurement channels 01 to 12 computation channels 31 to 42 M1 PM1 option Partial To use partial expanded display select On initial value is Off If On is selected the Expand and Boundary entry boxes appear e Expand Set the position where the boundary value is to be displayed within the display span in the range of 1 to 99 Boundary Set the value that is to be the boundary between the reduced section and the expanded section in the range of minimum span value 1 digit to maximum span value 1 digit However for channels that are set to scaling or square root computation the selectable range is minimum scale value 1 digit to maximum scale value 1 digit Example Suppose Expand and Boundary are set to 30 and 0 respectively for a channel with 6 V to 6 V measurement span The measured data for 6 V 0 V and 0 V 6 V are displayed in the O 30 and 70 100 ranges respectively Note If the range setting of a channel is set to Skip or if the span width is less than 1 digit partial expanded display cannot be used the Partial box is grayed 6 23 U9 U09 peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suonesado al Chapter 7 Data Save Load Operations 7 1 Setting Measured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Data Save to the External Storage Medium This s
21. Set the target channel for setting the alarm output The target channels are common with the range setting Off On Up to 4 alarms can be set to a single channel For each of the alarms 1 to 4 select On to enable an alarm Off to disable it If On is selected Type Value and Rly Relay entry boxes appear Type Select the alarm type conditions for activating the alarm from the following eight types Name Symbol Description Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured computed value is greater than or equal to the alarm value Lower limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured computed value is less than or equal to the alarm value Difference h An alarm occurs when the difference in the measured upper limit alarm values of two channels is greater than or equal to the difference high limit alarm value Difference An alarm occurs when the difference in the measured lower limit alarm values of two channels is less than or equal to the difference low limit alarm value Upper limit on R The rate of change of the measured values is checked rate of change alarm over a certain interval set using the Increase entry box of basic alarm settings An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the rising direction is greater than or equal to the specified value Lower limit on r The rate of change of the measured values is checked rate of change alarm over a
22. The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Assign Actions to the Remote Input Terminals Eight remote inputs are available Note With pulse measurement input PM1 option the default setting of Pulse is set in Action boxes 6 through 8 These terminals can also be used as remote input terminals However you can also assign Pulse to terminals 1 through 5 suoljoun 494109 JO suoneado e 9 6 Setting the Remote Control Function R1 PM1 Option Action Select the action to be assigned from the following Select None if you are not assigning any action Enclosed in are displays on the soft key menu e MemorySiart Stop Memory Starts stops the acquisition of the display data event data to the internal memory and the report function M1 PM1 option Trigger Trigger This input is used as an external trigger for starting the acquisition of the event data to the internal memory Ala
23. The index number of the report data currently displayed The number of report data sets in the internal memory Report type REPORT DATA or F EERE 26s 03 16 soho maa OER Index daa Kind Hourly P Start Oct 05 2003 07 54 38 Date and time the report started Timeup Oct 05 2003 68 00 00 Date and time the report was created ChUnit Sts Ave Hax Hin Sum a1 C 46 7 2 0 109 2 1 55910E 44 g2 y 0 022 1 00 1 001 7 17300E 00 B Bh 233 1 318 2 1 8 8 17600E 34 ax 5 0 BB 3 6 1 61e4 6 tc 342 5 30 1 325 7 1 103565 kPa 185 12 188 91 181 48 5 97921564 L T Status of data Average or instantaneous maximum Unit minimum and sum values Channel no tag For a description on report function see section 1 6 1 25 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg a 1 4 Display Function Historical Trend The waveform of the measured data in the internal memory or the external storage medium can be displayed This function is called Historical trend Methods Used to Display the Historical Trend The following four methods are available in displaying the historical trend of the display data or event data in the internal memory e Display from the alarm summary For the operating procedure see section 5 3 e Display from the message summary For the operating procedure see section 5 3 e Display from the memory summary For the operating procedure see section 5 3 e Recall from the screen menu For the oper
24. gt Trigger activated iy Trigger activated L gt Trigger activated Sieh Saving Data Using FUNC Key Operation During Auto Save Through FUNC key operation display data event data can be saved to the external storage medium at an arbitrary time during data acquisition For the operating procedure see section 7 3 Below is the behavior of this instrument when this operation is executed e When saving data at auto save intervals display data or data length event data Saving of the data is repeated at auto save intervals or every data length from the point when data is saved through key operation Example When auto save interval or data length is set to 1 hour Data saved through key operation 10 00 11 00 l 12 0012 20 13 20 Time gt l l l l l l 11 20 Save to the external 4 storage medium The data here is saved Note The save operation using the auto save interval or data length is executed by counting the auto save interval or data length from the last time the data was saved e When saving data at specified times The operation continues without change after saving the data through key operation Example When data is saved every hour on the hour 15 25 Data saved through key operation Start 13 10 14 00 15 00 1 16 00 17 00 Time m gt Save to the external storage medium This data This data is saved is saved 1 39 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 5 Data Storage Functi
25. 1 29 suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 5 Data Storage Function Display Data and Event Data The measured computed data are first acquired to this intrument s internal memory as two types of data display data and event data Eri l Maximum value Display data l PA Minimum value i a 1 6 1 4 Cs i Io i i i i Ce u Cale Sac a es ca l e i i Event data l i s i i e r 4 i _ Lan a oe Be ea 7 z Measured computed ae aaa ee ee oe i i i j S a i eas i data at scan intervals ae a ca i yee aane SECT PEE a TETRI en Time lt Scan interval lt Sampling inteval of event data Sampling inteval of display data time corresponding to one dot on the screen e Display Data Display data are used to display waveforms on this intrument s screen The sampling interval of display data is the time period corresponding to one dot on the screen This interval is determined by the display update rate The relationship between the display update rate and the sampling interval of display data is as follows Display Update 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 4h 10h Rate div Sampling interval 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 of display data s for the 3ch model only Display data consists of maximum and minimum values of the measured or computed data sample
26. 17 VA for DC 30 VA for AC Note e Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy applies to all models except for the ones with P1 option This instrument has no power switch Use an external switch to turn the power ON and OFF 2 12 2 5 Wiring the Power Supply Power Terminal and Protective Ground Terminal Arrangement Power terminals and protective ground terminal are arranged as shown in the figure below clololololo pai jam A ee Power terminals Protective ground terminal i 6 S SIG Terminal cover screw A f IoT f z F a a a o g o g a o o o o o fo oo D E AA a o a AAPA Zara Zara Zara AA Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the power to this instrument and open the cover transparent for the power supply wires 2 Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord to the power supply terminals Use crimp on lugs with isolation sleeves for 4 mm screws except for P1 model for P1 model 100 240V AC 2aVDC 17VAMAX 50 60Hz 35VAMAX 24V AC BO 60Hz 30VA M L N a L NO Tightening torque for cover screws 0 6Nem Protectiv
27. 4 FTP connection 5 Control Login Timeout 6 Serial Memory out 7 Hodbus master BASIC 8 Hodbus master COMMAND 1 2 3 4 lt 1 Ethernet IP_Address gt C7 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Ethernet IP_Address gt IP address 0 0 0 0 Ethernet IP_Address gt Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 Ethernet IP_Address gt Default gateway 0 0 0 0 lt 2 Ethernet DNS gt C7 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Ethernet DNS gt DNS On Off On Off Off Ethernet DNS gt Server search order gt Primary 0 0 0 0 Ethernet DNS gt Server search order gt Secondary 0 0 0 0 Ethernet DNS gt Host name Up to 64 alphanumeric characters 7 Ethernet DNS gt Domain name Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Ethernet DNS gt Domain suffix search order gt Primary Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Ethernet DNS gt Domain suffix search order gt Secondary Up to 64 alphanumeric characters App 22 Appendix 6 List of Parameters lt 3 FTP transfer file gt C7 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value FTP transfer file gt Disp amp Event data On Off Off FTP transfer file gt Report On Off Off FTP transfer file gt Snapshot On Off Off lt 4 FTP connection gt C7 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value FTP connection Primary or Secondary Primary FTP connection gt FTP se
28. 7 Modbus master BASIC gt 2 on models without C7 C2 or C3 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Basic settings gt Read cycle 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 1s Basic settings gt Timeout 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s 5s 10s or1 min 1s Basic settings gt Retrials Off 1 2 3 4 5 10 or 20 1 lt 8 Modbus master COMMAND gt 3 on models without C7 C2 or C3 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Command settings gt 1 to 8 On Off Off Command settings gt 1 to 8 gt First Last C01 to C12 C01 C01 Command settings gt 1 to 8 gt Addr 1 to 247 1 Command settings gt 1 to 8 gt Regi Input registers 30001 to 39999 300001 to 365535 30001 Hold registers 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465535 Command settings gt 1 to 8 gt Type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B INT16 UINT32_L FLOAT_B or FLOAT_L App 23 xipueddy E Appendix 6 List of Parameters 11 Web E Mail C7 Option Setup Node Web E Mail 1 Web 2 Basic E Mail settings 3 Alarm E Mail settings 4 Scheduled E Mail settings 5 System E Mail settings 6 Report E Mail settings 1 2 3 4 lt 1 Web gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Web gt Use Not Use Not Not Web gt Page type Operator or Monitor Operator Web gt Page type gt On Off On Off Off Web gt Page type gt Command On Off
29. A file with the same name exists A directory with files cannot be deleted Delete files in the directory first 220 The file is already in use Try again later Wait till file is free 230 There is no setting file Access to other files Extension of setting files is pnl 231 Abnormal setting exists in file Access to other files Create a new setting file e Errors related to historical trend Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 232 There is no available data This message may appear when recalling historical trend Access to other files 233 The specified historical data do not exist This message may appear when recalling historical trend See section 5 3 234 The specified channel is not assigned to the display group This message may appear when switching to trend or bar graph from overview See section 5 2 e Errors related to e mail and Web server Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 260 IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available The IP address is not specified Check the IP address 261 SMTP server is not found Occurs when the SMTP server is specified by name e Check the DNS setting e Check the SMTP server name 262 Cannot initiate E mail transmission e The host name of this instrument is not correct Check the host name e The port number for SMTP server is not correct Check the po
30. MESSAGE SUNOS sirae eE 6 6 message SUIMMANY wei 5cecccssodcccsacsiessasceneadercesecoecesseeecxdenesaesses 5 5 MeCSSAGEN wv ssicricvectersecassrecaveversinvares senasatenssteaceseasenvaxtentdtents 9 12 Mode model MOMMY TODON ss icscsscaccvssrsemasciensseescosinaviieacsinaenscaarete 1 47 IMOVINQSAVGTAQS iiss iscisezeesccshisansicenscercaresesdvadosthdane seas 4 3 4 6 N number of data bytes per channel eee App 1 number of display data files s 1732 number of pulses per second 4 14 Number of Samples ssceesseeeseesenees 8 13 numerical display computation channel ceee 1 43 numerical display measurement channel s 1 20 numerical display report numerical display section O operation KOy issons aspa aE RA ENEE EN operation MOE ccceeeceseeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeneeeess option terminal block order of precedence of the operators 0 1 43 App 6 over display range Computation cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 43 OVOF FANG E E PT E 1 20 over range measurement 1 46 1 48 OVET OW Tirati srities ai aaaea ip ARASEN EEEE 1 43 OVEIVIOW SCE a NN ae 5 4 P pa el cut diagraNi zsrsr seue iea 2 3 panel mounting 2 3 parallel COMMOCHION vvcssesieseveeveurccerscies eeteree ven aecciaessseaeeey 2 5 Partial bonan U SAE 6 21 6 23 partial expanded display cccecccveccisieesscasecsscvecisectseseeresees 6 21
31. Press the DISP ENTER key The pop up window disappears and the date time is set To cancel the settings and close the Time set pop up window press the ESC key e Selecting the summer or winter time Use the right arrow key to shift the cursor blue to the DST The selections are displayed at the bottom of the display 1 5 Use the soft key to select Summer or Winter Press the DISP ENTER key The pop up window disappears and the date time is set To cancel the settings and close the Time set pop up window press the ESC key e Setting daylight savings time 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Summer or Winter box A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to change If you select On the box for the date and time appears to the right The cursor blue moves to the right Press the Input soft key The numeric entry pop up window appears Enter the date time using the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor blue the up and down arrow keys to select a number Press the DISP ENTER key The pop up window disappears and the date time is set To cancel the settings and close the pop up window press the ESC key Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Daylight Savings Time e Summer
32. Time div Auto save interval is the interval at which the display data residing in the internal memory are saved to the external storage medium The selectable values for Auto save interval vary depending on the Time div setting For the setting procedure see section 7 1 s u juo peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suoneado al 6 4 Writing Messages on the Trend Screen This section explains how to set and write the messages that can be displayed on the trend screen Message Strings lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 4 soft key select Message File From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display GROUP 1 Seo Oct 85 2003 09 40 25 Aw Hessage No Characters 1 oane wN Input Clear Copy Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to one of the Characters boxes under Message A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Input soft key A message pop up window appears 3 Enter the message using the soft keys and arrow keys 4 Press the DISP ENTER key The message pop up window closes and the cursor moves to the next Characters box 5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 to enter all the messages you wish 6 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Setup Items Setting t
33. Writing of display data to the internal memory can be executed if set up accordingly the Data item under Memory is set to Display or E D see section 7 1 for more information Writing of event data to the internal memory can be executed if set up accordingly the D ata item under Memory is set to Event or E D see section 7 1 for more information Opening the Operation Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data gt 4 soft key select Load display data or 5 soft key select Load event data if event data is to be loaded From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following display GROUP 1 G EaP Tem KEZA EE Roe M e ct 05 2003 09 49 56 Wee ct 05 2003 14 18 29 AA AE Load display data Load event data Directory File name Time Directory File name Time 0507453 DDS 2003 10 05 07 46 0510363 DEY 2003 10 05 10 37 0514173 DEY 2003 10 05 14 1 0507543 DDS 2003 10 05 08 0 0508043 DDS 2003 10 05 08 1 0508343 DDS 2003 10 05 08 37 EJE ATA 161 ATA 182 ATA 183 ATA 164 DATA 185 K K K Eg Eg Operations on the Display 1 From the directories listed in the Directory name box select the directory in which the file you wish to load is located using the up and down arrow keys Root directory is denoted by A list of files in the selected directory is displayed on the right 2 Press the right arrow key to move the cursor t
34. ms or more can be counted This instrument counts the following changes Contact signal pulse input contact changes from open to closed Open collector signal input terminal level changes from High to Low Pulse Less than or equal to 100Hz Contact signal TLL lt 0 ll T t era head More than or equal to 5 ms each signal Recorder Counting Input Pulses You can count and display the number of pulses input at each scan interval using computation channels Sum Value To display the pulse sum value an equation is entered on the computation channels to be displayed Number of Pulses per Unit Time To display the number of pulses per unit time 1 s 1 min and 1hour an equation is entered on the computation channels to be displayed Using computation channels sum of pulses are calculated and displayed For information about the computation function see section 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option Note ___ The pulse detection interval is approximately 3 9 ms If the pulse width is not 5 ms or greater this instrument may not be able to detect it a Less than 5 ms Pulse signal AL a change cannot be detected res detection interval approximately 3 9 ms 1 7 suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 3 Alarm Function This function generates an alarm when the measured computed data meets a certain condition When an alarm occurs information notifying the alarm occurren
35. or External initial value is Internal This setting is valid only for thermocouple inputs Internal Uses the reference junction compensation function of this instrument External Uses the external reference junction compensation function If set to External a box for entering the reference junction compensation voltage that is to be added to the input appears Set the value in the range of 20000 uV to 20000 uV initial value is O uV Temperature Unit for Thermocouple and RTD Input Temperature Select from C centigrade or F Fahrenheit This setting is common to all channels with thermocouple or RTD input 4 2 4 1 Setting Parameters Related to Measurement Inputs Range Filter Moving Average lt Setting Mode gt The range setting operation is unavailable while this instrument is writing data to the internal memory or performing computations Opening the Setting Display e Setting the range MENU key switch to setting mode gt 1 soft key select Range Alarm From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display st os oag 09 37 09 Mior ME O First CH E Last cH for Range Hode Type Range Span L Span_U Scale RTD PT 200 0 660 6 Scale L Scale U Unit 6 68 266 68 Alarm 1 lott 2 lore 3 Off 4 Off orm m02 m03 ad e Setting the filter moving average MENU key switch to setting mode gt 2 soft key select Tag Moving average or Filter Alarm delay From
36. returns to the first item box Auto Save Interval Auto save interval The possible values from the following table is displayed as choices for the auto save interval The maximum auto save interval varies depending on the display update rate sampling interval is determined from the display update rate the data type display data only display data and event data and the number of channels to be stored Display update 15 s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 4h 10h rate DIV Sampling 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 interval s Auto save 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10min interval 20min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20 min choices 30 min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30min 30min 1h th 1h th th 1h 1h 1h 1h 1h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 1day 1day 1day 1day iday 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 10 day 14 day 14day 14 day 14 day 14 day 14 day 14 day 14 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day for the 3 ch model only 7
37. when Fmin lt Fmax Over or when Fmin gt Fmax Over 1 4 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Burnout Detection When measuring temperature using a thermocouple and the thermocouple burns out you can specify the measurement result to be set to positive over range or negative over range Burnout can be set on each measurement channel Positive over range is a condition in which the input signal is over the upper limit of the measurable range Negative over range is a condition in which the input signal is below the lower limit of the measurable range The measured value is indicated as Burnout for both cases Reference Junction Compensation RJC When measuring the temperature using a thermocouple the reference junction compensation can be used You can select whether to use the reference junction compensation provided by this instrument or external reference junction compensation If you are using external reference junction compensation you will also set the reference voltage Note When using the external reference junction compensation set an appropriate reference junction compensation voltage As in the example in the following figure if the reference junction temperature for the external reference junction compensation is TO C set the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C reference for TO C as the reference junction compensation voltage An example of External reference juncti
38. 0 1 A resistive load Computation Functions M1 Item Specifications Number of channels assignable to computed data 12 channels Operation General arithmetic operations Four arithmetic operations square root absolute common logarithm exponential power relational operations lt lt gt logical operations AND OR NOT XOR Statistical operations Average maximum minimum summation and maximum minimum Special operations Rolling average moving average on computed results Constant Available up to 30 constants Symbols K01 to K30 Digital input data via communication Digital data via communication can be used in calculation expression except statistical operations Number of data Up to 12 data Symbols C01 to C12 Remote input status Remote input status 0 1 can be used in calculation expression up to 8 inputs Symbols D01 to D08 Pulse input Counts pulses up to 3 inputs expandable to 8 inputs Symbols D06 to D08 or D01 to D08 12 10 12 5 Specifications of Optional Functions Item Specifications TLOG data Saves data of all channels at each interval specified by a timer Report functions Report type Hourly daily hourly daily daily monthly and daily weekly Operation Average or instantaneous selectable maximum minimum and summation Data format ASCII 3 terminal Isolated RTD Input N2 Item Specifications Terminal isolation A B and b terminals
39. 16 characters HHH H File header 82 characters ccc ssc Channel number or tag name 16 characters uuuuuu Unit 6 characters eeeeeeee Status of the data used E Error data O Over range or computation overflow P Power failure c Time change yyyy no dd Date the report is created hh mi Time the report is created nnn n Report value 13 digits File Output Example The following example shows the daily report for four channels DAILY REPORT START TIME 2000 01 31 20 00 Model Serial No 12A338617 y File Header Processl Lot2 a CH TAG CHO1 CH02 GE E CH04 UNIT V uy uy uy 2000 01 01 00 00 Cry cr A Chp c AVE 0 00 0 10 0 20 0 30 MAX 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 MIN 0 00 1 00 2 00 3 00 SUM 0 000000E 01 1 000000E 04 2 000000E 04 3 000000E 04 App 16 Appendix 5 Data Formats of ASCII Files Note When the measurement and computation channel data enter the condition described in the following table status E O and B are output in the report Data Condition Status Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over range O Negative over range O Burnout B For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow
40. 2 Modbus master Displays the Modbus status when the Modbus master function is used 1 Available on models with the Ethernet interface regardless of whether an external storage medium drive is installed 2 See the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 Procedure Operation Keys 1 Press the FUNC key As shown in the following figure menu assigned to the soft keys is displayed The menu varies depending on the setup information and options GROUP 1 Oct 85 2083 Hanual Hedia AlarmACK Message sample Next 1 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the function you wish to execute If Next 1 n where n is the number of menu lines appears at the right end of the menu this indicates that there are multiple lines of menus Press the Next 1 n soft key to view the next menu Press a soft key to execute the function assigned to it The result of the soft key being pressed varies depending on its function as is explained in later sections of this manual To clear the menu without executing functions press the FUNC or ESC key 3 5 suoneiado UOWWWIOD pue s pon Aejdsiq Sued Jo soweN eo 3 2 Basic Key Operations Operation of Other Keys in Operation Mode Procedure Operation Keys START STOP fy START STOP Key e Starts stops the data acquisition to the internal memory The waveform display on the trend screen is also started stop
41. 5 suoljeiedo peo anes erd 7 1 Setting Measured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Data Save to the External Storage Medium File Header Destination Directory Name Data to Be Saved during Manual Save Operation lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 6 soft key select File DST From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display The figure below shows an example when set to manual save When in auto save mode the Save data box is not displayed GROUP 1 na Oct 05 2003 09 43 49 Ame Ol File Header Sittin Directory name DATA 184 Save data All Daylight saving time Y Y MM DD HH Summer Off Winter Off Input Clear Copy Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note Header and Directory name are set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box File
42. 50 Hz 60 Hz or 100 ms Auto A D gt Scan interval 3 ch model 250 ms 250 ms 6 ch and 12 ch model 1 sor2s 1s A D gt First CH 01 to 12 01 A D gt Last CH 01 to 12 01 A D gt Burnout set Off Up or Down Off A D gt RJC Internal or External Internal A D gt Volt uV 20000 uV to 20000 uV 0 uV Temperature gt Unit CorF C App 18 Appendix 6 List of Parameters 3 Memory Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Memory gt Save Manual or Auto Auto Memory gt Data Display E D or Event Display Memory gt Event gt Sample rate 3 ch model 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2s 5s 10s 250 ms 30 s 60 s 120 s 300 s or 600 s 6 ch and 12 ch model 1 s 2 s 5s 10 s 30 s 60s 1s 120 s 300 s or 600 s Memory gt Event gt Mode Free Trigger or Rotate Trigger Memory gt Event gt Block 1 2 4 8 or 16 1 Memory gt Event gt Data length 3 minutes to 31 days th Memory gt Event gt Pre trigger 0 5 25 50 75 95 or 100 0 Memory gt Event gt Trigger gt Key On Off On Memory gt Event gt Trigger gt External On Off Off Memory gt Event gt Trigger gt Alarm On Off Off 4 Memory and Trend Memory Timeup Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Memory and trend gt Meas CH Math CH Meas CH Math CH Meas CH Memory and trend gt First CH Meas CH 01 to 12 Math CH 31 to 42 01 Memory and trend gt Last CH Meas CH 01 to 12 Math CH 31 to 42 01 Memory and tren
43. Display e Saving setup data MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 8 soft key select Save Load Initialize gt 1 soft key select Save settings From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following display Save settings File name File name Time A A3 PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 AE PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 E ee Input 7 22 7 9 Saving and Loading Setup Data e Loading setup data MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 8 soft key select Save Load Initialize gt 2 soft key select Load settings From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following display Setup Mode Load settings File name Time Al PNL 2003 89 25 14 37 AE2 PNL 2003 09 25 14 37 B 1 PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 A102 PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 ALE PNL 2003 10 04 09 03 A3 PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 AE PNL 2003 09 25 14 36 Note If you attempt to load the setup data and the external storage medium does not contain the setup data a message There is no setting file appears Operations on the Display e Saving setup data See Saving Setup Data on page 7 21 e Loading setup data See Loading Setup Data of Setting Mode on page 7 22 Saving Setup Data See the description in Setup Items on page 7 22 Loading Setup Data e Loading the setup data in basi
44. Header Destination Directory Name Data to Be Saved during Manual Save Operation e File e Header Enter the header comment to be written to the data file using up to 32 alphanumeric characters The specified header is written to all display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data M1 PM1 option and report data M1 PM1 option files e Directory name Set the name of the directory for saving the data on the external storage medium The following characters or strings cannot be used as file names AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK character strings that include a space or spaces All the data excluding the setup data display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data M1 PM1 option report data M1 PM1 option and screen image data are saved to the specified directory The setup data is saved to the root directory 7 1 Setting Measured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Data Save to the External Storage Medium The save destination directory varies depending on how the data is saved Auto save Directory specified here Manual save Directory with a sequence number added to the string specified here For example if the specified directory name is DATAO the first manual save operation saves the data to the DATA0O 000 directory The second operation saves the data to the DATA0 001 directory Collectively saving data when data acquisition is stopped Directory
45. Internal processing error 1 See the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 75611 2 Contact your nearest dealer 3 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure Note e The FTP client function on this instrument has a timer function that drops the connection if there is no data transfer for two minutes If the server does not respond within this time period the transfer fails e The FTP client function on this instrument overwrites files with the same file names on the server without any warnings unless the server rejects the request For information regarding the FTP client function of this instrument see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 75611 Communication Errors For information regarding the communication function of this instrument see the the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 75611 e Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes Output Communication Command Execution and Setup Data Loading Code Message 300 Command is too long 301 Too many number of commands delimited with 302 This command has not been defined 303 Data request command can not be enumerated with sub delimiter 350 Command is not permitted to the current user level 351 This command cannot be specified in the current mode 352 The option is
46. K01 If a pulse sum value exceeded the reset value calculates the number of pulses that exceeded the reset value 34 31 GE K01 is 1 if the pulse sum value 34 31 is greater than or equal to the reset value K01 otherwise it is 0 The number of pulses that exceeded the reset value is calculated by taking the difference between the sum value and the reset value and multiplying it by this value App 11 xipueddy 3 Appendix 3 Pulse Measurement Setting Example Pulse Sum Value Reset If It Exceeds a Fixed Value Channel 34_Pulse Sum Value Equation 34 31 LT K01 34 31 33 Calculates the pulse sum value 34 31 LT KO1 is 1 if the pulse sum value 34 31 is less than the reset value K01 otherwise it is 0 This pulse sum value is calculated by multiplying this value by the pulse sum value 34 31 and adding the number of pulses exceeding the reset value calculated on channel 33 Operation Diagram paneer Ladera ae ne ete Ce E geen IIL ime Scan interval Ch 31 gt Number of pulses per scan interval Ch 32 Number of reset actions Ch 33 Remaining number of pulses Reset value Sum Ch 34 Sum value Subtracts the reset value Total Sum Value Calculation To calculate the total sum value use channel numbers higher than the numbers of t
47. Key lock icon Note While the keylock function is enabled a keylock icon appears in the status indication section For the description of the status display section see section 1 4 Display Function If you press a locked key while the keylock function is enabled a message This key is locked appears The key lock ON OFF condition is retained even if the power is turned OFF Thus the next time the power is turned ON the preexisting state is restored 9 3 suoljoun 19410 JO suoneado e 9 2 Disabling Certain Keys Keylock Function Releasing the Keylock In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display ae O oe Pa sic kel hake rO 3 HE Kevtock ESNS pa 2 3 i STOP shot Press the Keylock soft key A password entry pop up window appears Enter the password using the soft keys and arrow keys Bot Ds 2903 08 55 56 Mor EEAS ro mO Keylock cancel Password ABCDEFGHIJ KLMNOPQRST UVWXY2R 9 EEE Ee Press the DISP ENTER key If the password you entered is correct the pop up window closes and the keylock is released The keylock icon in the status display section disappears 9 4 9 3 Using Key Login Logout Function This section explains how to set this instrument so that only certain users can operate the instrument and how to log in and log out after the function is enabled User Registration lt Basi
48. Math Color gt CH31 Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue Red violet gray lime cyan dark blue yellow light gray or purple Math Color gt CH32 Same as above Green Math Color gt CH33 Same as above Blue Math Color gt CH34 Same as above Blue violet Math Color gt CH35 Same as above Brown Math Color gt CH36 Same as above Orange Math Color gt CH37 Same as above Yellow green Math Color gt CH38 Same as above Light blue Math Color gt CH39 Same as above Violet Math Color gt CH40 Same as above Gray Math Color gt CH41 Same as above Lime Math Color gt CH42 Same as above Cyan lt 6 Math Zone Graph Partial gt M1 or PM1 option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value First CH 31 to 42 31 Last CH 31 to 42 31 Zone gt Lower 0 to 95 0 Zone gt Upper 5 to 100 100 Graph gt Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 or C10 10 Graph gt Bar graph Normal or Center Normal Graph gt Scale position 1 to 6 or Off 1 Partial On Off Off Partial gt Expand 1 to 99 50 Partial gt Boundary Minimum span value 1 digit to maximum span value 1 digit 0 00 App 29 xipueddy E Index Symbols Alarm ACK softkey ave AlarmACK soft key 411 E Mail START softkey ceeee T 3 5 E Mail STOP softkey eee E Mail test softkey wae ENG SOM KCY scivccrcctiAedecewedecdeciec teedsadanscateededeevetes ET
49. Message5 Message6 Message7 Message8 Snapshot Pulse No 1 to 5 None No 6 to 8 Pulse App 21 xipueddy E Appendix 6 List of Parameters lt 2 Report gt M1 or PM1 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Report gt Report set Off Hour Day Hour Day Day Week or Day Month Off Report gt Ave Inst Ave or Inst Ave Report gt Date 1 to 28 1 Report gt Day of the week SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI or SAT SUN Report gt Time hour 0 to 23 0 Report gt Report CH R01 to R12 R01 Report gt Off On On Off On Report gt Channel 01 to 12 31 to 42 01 Report gt Sum scale Off s min h or day s 1 When the report type is monthly report 2 When the report type is weekly report lt 3 Timer TLOG gt M1 or PM1 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Timer TLOG gt No 1to3 1 Timer TLOG gt Mode Off Relative or Absolute 1 Absolute 2 and 3 Off Timer TLOG gt Interval for Absolute 1 min 2 min 3 min 4 min 5 min 6 min 10 min 12 min 1h 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h or 24h Timer TLOG gt Interval for Relative 00 01 to 24 00 01 00 Timer TLOG gt Ref time for Absolute 0 00 to 23 00 0 00 Timer TLOG gt Reset On Off Off Timer TLOG gt Action Off or DataSave Off 10 Communication Setup Node Communication 1 Ethernet IP_Address 2 Ethernet lt DNS gt 3 FTP transfer file
50. Oct 66 07 58 49 TI 161 SH Ot 67 54 57 Oct 66 B7255 38 TI 161 1H Oct 65 07 54 42 Oct 66 07 5 52 FI 163 1H Oct 65 07 54 35 Oct 66 07 56 00 Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in Changing the Display The data of the following type is displayed When configured to acquire the display data to the internal memory Display data e When configured to acquire the event data to the internal memory Event data When configured to acquire the display data and the event data to the internal memory Data type selected in the memory summary 5 5 su 19 5 uone do y uo SUOT e10dO K 5 3 Displaying Information List Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Recalling the Historical Trend for When the Message Was Written This operation is carried out on the message summary 1 Move the cursor using the up and down arrow keys and select the message shee MENS i 04 4 Messase Time PROCESS2 Oct 05 2003 08 11 30 Cursor PROCES51 Oct 185 2003 08 02 42 START Oct 5 2063 07 55 16 START Oct 5 2003 07 54 13 2 Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in Changing the Display The data of the following type is displayed When configured to acquire the display data to the internal memory Display data e When configured to acquire the event data to the internal memory Event data e When configured to acquire the disp
51. On initial value is Off e Interval Select the sampling interval when taking the moving average from the following 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 3s 4s 5s 6s 10s 12s 15s 20s 30s 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min and 1h Only for the 3 ch model However if the scan interval is set to 2s and the sampling interval is set to an odd numbered sampling interval 1s 3s 5s or 15s the actual sampling interval is set to 2s 4s 6s or 16s respectively 8 12 8 5 Setting the Rolling Average e Number of samples Set the average count when taking the moving average using an integer between 1 and 250 ote _ _ s_ e Ifthe number of data points to be averaged has not reached the specified number of samples immediately after computation is started the average of the available data is calculated e Computation error data is excluded from the rolling average computation e If the computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit the data is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the rolling average is computed The upper and lower limit is 100000000 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position is the same as that of the span lower limit uondo LINd 40 LIN suoneiado pay uonouny Wodsy pue uoNeyndwoyg eo 8 6 Creating Reports This section explains how to set the report type report creation channels report creation time and other items Re
52. PROCESS 2 1 4 Display Function Zone Display The display range zone can be set for each channel In the example shown in the figure below channel 1 is displayed in the zone 0 to 30 channel 2 in the zone 30 to 60 and channel 3 in the zone 60 to 100 Normal display Zone display Zone 1 Zone2 Zone3 0 30 60 100 0 100 is g e gt Ze a CH1 CH2 CH3 Partial Expanded Display By compressing a section of the display scale of the waveform the remaining section of is expanded You specify a value on the display scale boundary value to be moved to another position on the display scale boundary value displacement position In the example shown below 0 V boundary value is moved to the 30 position of the display scale boundary value displacement position The section below the boundary represents 6 V to 0 V and the section above the boundary represents 0 V to 6 V Normal Display Partial Expanded Dispaly Compressed portion Expanded portion of full display span 0 50 0 30 100 6V 0 6V 6V 0 6V Measured value Measured value Alarm Indication The indications of preset alarm marks vary depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication as follows Non hold Hold A
53. Ref Time under Absolute timer are set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Setting the Timer e Number Select timer number from 1 2 and 3 e Mode Select either Relative or Absolute Select Off if you do not use the timer 8 9 uondo LINd 10 LIN suoneiado pay uonouny Wodsey pue uoNeyndwoy eo 8 4 Setting the Timer for Statistical Computations TLOG Computation and Data Save TLOG Data When Relative Is Selected e Interval Set the time until the end of the interval in hour minute 00 01 to 24 00 e Reset Set whether to reset the TLOG computation value at every interval On or Off e Action See Data Save at Intervals Specified by the Timer below When Absolute Is Selected e Interval Set the time until the end of the interval from the following 19 types 1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min 12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h and 24h e Ref time Set the time to be used as the reference The reference time is set in the range
54. Time i gt PNL 2003 09 25 14 3 PNL 2003 09 25 14 3 PNL 2003 09 25 14 3 DATA 183 2 PNL 2003 09 25 14 3 PNL 2003 09 25 14 3 PNL 2003 09 25 14 3 Free space ECUBEM_ L2H 2003 09 24 15 1 29304 Kbytes gt m N Slo al kcal Pa Ey Milolele miele aa heal m n e Deleting files 7 soft key select Delete Delete Directory File name Time PNG 2003 10705 DTG 2003 10 05 DHR 2003 10 05 DDS 2003 10 05 PNG 2003 10 05 DTG 2003 10 05 DHR 2003 10 05 X0507473 DDS 2003 10 05 07 47 volume name Type Quick Input Clear Copy suoneado peo7 anes ea 7 7 Managing Files and Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium Operations on the Display e Deleting files or directories Ws NOTO eee If the ESC key is pressed in the middle of the operation the screen returns to the Save Load Clear Data menu From the directories listed in the Directory name box select the directory in which the file you wish to delete is located using the up and down arrow keys To collectively delete all files in a directory select the directory and proceed to step 4 To delete an entire directory first delete all files in the directory then proceed to step 4 Press the right arrow key to move the blue cursor to the file list section Select the file to be deleted using the up and down arrow keys To move the blue cursor back to the Directory name column press th
55. a trip line to from 1 to 4 e Trip line e Off On On Use the trip line Off Do not use the trip line e Position Enter the position in the range of 0 to 100 of the scale 6 8 6 5 Displaying a Line to Indicate a Particular Value of Interest Trip Line on the Trend Screen e Color The initial color settings of colors are as follows Trip line no 1 red no 2 green no 3 blue no 4 yellow To change the color select from the following 16 colors Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray lime cyan dark blue yellow light gray and purple Line Width of Trip Lines You can select the line width of trip lines see section 6 9 s u juo peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suonesado al 6 6 Changing the Channel Display Color This section explains how to change the waveform color on trend displays and the bar color on bar graph displays For the procedures in changing the background color of operation displays such as the trend display see section 6 9 Setting the Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width and Grid For the procedure in changing the trip line color of the trend display see section 6 5 Displaying a Line to Indicate a Particular Value of Interest Trip Line on the Trend Screen Channel Display Color lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display Colors of measurement channels MENU key s
56. applied to the input output signal wires connected to this instrument the terminal or signal wire may become damaged To prevent this from happening fix all the wiring cords to the rear of the installation panel Arrangement of the Option Terminal Block The option terminal block is arranged on the rear panel of this instrument as shown in the figure below A ooog Terminal cover screws A f f a ao fo B HEE Option terminal block a a a Ao e at la S S The option terminal block is included when the following option codes are specified Alarm output relay option code A1 A2 A3 FAIL memory end output relay option code F1 remote control option code R1 pulse measurement input option code PM1 A terminal cover is screwed on the option terminal block A label showing the arrangement of the terminals is affixed to the cover Note e The installation position of each terminal block is fixed and cannot be changed Fora description on the connection of communication interfaces such as the serial or Ethernet interface see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 2 4 Optional Input Output Terminal Wiring Terminal Arrangement on the Option Terminal Block Terminals are arranged as shown in the figure below according to
57. at that point is acquired to the internal memory except for measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF Manual sample operation is executed Time F gt t td l The measured computed data of all channels are acquired to the internal memory e Upto 50 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data Note The number of manual sampled data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary See section 1 4 TLOG Data M1 PM1 Option All the measured computed data of all channels can be acquired to the internal memory at the preset interval However this excludes measurement channels that are skipped and computation channels that are turned OFF e TLOG data is acquired from the time the computation is started till the computation is stopped e TLOG data is acquired at each time interval set by timers and when the computation is stopped Interval time set by the timer Start Stop Ba tc a t t2 tn tn 1 Time l t to The measured computed data of all channels are acquired to the internal memory e Upto 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data Note Upto 16 blocks number of computation start and stop operations can be created in the internal memory When the number of blocks
58. basic setting mode Error messages even if they are displayed are not saved Note This function is available on models with an external storage drive or models with the Ethernet communication interface option C7 that are set up for snapshot FTP transfer e Pulse input Pulse You can use the remote input terminals as pulse input terminals For a description on pulse input see page 1 7 Remote Input Signal The above operations are carried out on the rising or falling edge of the remote signal edge or the ON signal lasting at least 250 ms trigger Edge rising falling Trigger Rising Falling gt 4 lt 250 ms or more 1 53 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 8 Remote Control Function R1 PM1 Option For contact inputs the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open For open collector signals the remote signal rises when the collector signal voltage level of the remote terminal goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high 1 54 1 9 Other Functions USER key Key Lock One of the following actions can be assigned to the USER key Alarm ACK is initially assigned Action That Can Be Assigned Name of Action Action None None Trigger Provides a key trigger for starting acquiring the event data when Key Trigger is setas atriggerto start acquiring event data AlarmACK Rel
59. be 100 mV or less Common mode noise 50 60 Hz 250 Vrms AC or less for all ranges Maximum noise voltage between channels 50 60 Hz 250 VACrms or less Can be inclined up to 30 deg backward Mounting at an angle away from the perpendicular is not acceptable At least 30 minutes after power on 2000 m or less above sea level Il EN61010 1 Il CSA1010 1 2 Power Supply Item Specifications Rated power supply 100 to 240 VAC Allowable power supply voltage range 90 to 132 or 180 to 264 VAC Rated power supply frequency 50 60 Hz Rated Power consumption 35 VA Power consumption Power supply LCD backlight saver ON Power consumption maximum 100 VAC 10 VA 14 VA 25 VA 240 VAC 18 VA 2 2VA 35 VA 12 13 suoneoyioeds B 12 6 General Specifications Isolation Item Specifications Insulation resistance Dielectric strength Grounding resistance Each terminal to ground terminal 20 MQ or greater at 500 VDC Power supply to ground terminal 2300 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute excet for P1 model Power supply to ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute for P1 model Contact output terminal to ground terminal 1600 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Measuring input terminal to ground terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Between measuring input terminals 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute except for RTD input terminals Between remote control terminal to ground terminal 1000 VDC 1 min
60. box under Time zone Input is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Input soft key The pop up window appears 3 Enter the time difference using the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor blue the up and down arrow keys to select a number 4 Press the DISP ENTER key The pop up window disappears and the time difference is set To cancel the settings and clear the pop up window press the ESC key 5 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation window appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Setup Items Time Zone Set the time difference with respect to Greenwich Mean Time from 1200 to 1200 the upper two digits indicate the hour the lower two digits indicate the minute The initial value is set to 0 Example The standard time in Japan is ahead of the Greenwich Mean Time by 9 hours In this case enter 900 3 8 Confirming the System Configuration Firmware Version Number and MAC Address of This Instrument System Configuration Firmware Version Number MAC Address lt Operation Mode gt Opening the System Information Screen 1 In the operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 52003 08 24 54 ose EIA k Hath Snap Rev loek ere 2 Press the
61. channel 2 computation channel None Data Max data no and sampling length Display data Max data no 1 200 000 2 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 300 000 However since 120 000 data points is the limit Max data no 120 000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 120 000 data points x 1 s 120 000 s approx 33 hours Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Max data no and sampling length Event data Max data no 1 200 000 12 CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 25 000 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 25 000 data points x 1 s 25 000 s approx 7 hours Display Data and Event Data Measurement channel 2 computation channel none Data Max data no and sampling length Display data Maximum number of data points 900 000 2 CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 112 500 However since 75 000 data points is the limit Max data no 75 000 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 75 000 data points x 60 s 4 500 000 s approx 52 days Event data Max data no 300 000 2 CH x 2 bytes 0 x 4 bytes 75 000 However since 30 000 data points is the limit Max data no 30 000 data points When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 30 000 data points x 1 s 30 000 s approx 8 hours Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Max data no and sampling length D
62. computation level M1 or PM1 option Reset of computation data trigger 250 ms or longer M1 or PM1 option Manual sampling trigger 250 ms or longer Writing messages up to 8 different messages can be set trigger 250 ms or longer Load of setting parameters up to 3 setup data files can be set trigger 250 ms or longer Rleasing alarm output Alarm ACK operation trigger 250 ms or longer Snapshot saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium trigger 24 VDC AC Power Supply P1 Item Specifications Rated power supply 24 VDC AC Allowable power supply voltage range 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz for AC Permitted supply voltage frequency range Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Rated Power consumption Power consumption Effects on measured value 50 60 Hz 2 for AC Power supply to ground terminal 500 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 minute Each terminal to ground terminal 20 MQ or greater at 500 VDC 17 VA for DC 30 VA for AC Power supply LCD backlight saver ON Power consumption maximum 24 VDC 7VA 17 VA 25 VA 24 VAC 13 VA 30VA 35 VA With variation within 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 24 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less 12 12 12 6 General Specifications Construction Item Specifications Mounting Flush panel mou
63. computation overflow for computation channels 1 46 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option Report Function This function is used to create hourly daily weekly and monthly reports The report data can be displayed on the screen Types of Reports e Hourly report On every hour on the hour the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from an hour of data up to the current hour and stored to the internal memory e Daily report At the specified time everyday the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a day of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory e Weekly report At the specified time of the specified day every week the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a week of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory e Monthly report At the specified time of the specified date every month the average maximum minimum and sum values of the specified channels are determined from a month of data up to the specified time and stored to the internal memory Report Data Display For a display example of report data see page 1 25 Combinations of Reports That Can be Created The reports created by this instrument can be set to hourly only and daily daily and weekly or daily and monthly EED ne daily
64. confirmed Function Assignment to the USER Key Select one of the following actions The initial value is AlarmACK Name of Action Reference Action None No operation Trigger 7 2 Supplies a trigger used to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data is specified to be acquired and the key trigger is set to start the acquisition AlarmACK 4 2 Clears the alarm indication relay output valid only when the operation of the alarm indication or output relay is set to Hold MathStart Stop 8 2 Starts stops computation only for models with the computation function M1 PM1 option MathReset 8 2 Resets the computed data resets to 0 only on models with the computation function M1 PM1 option while the computation is stopped ManualSample 7 4 Writes the measured computed values of all channels to the internal memory once Message1 to 8 6 4 Displays the message 1 to 8 on the trend screen and write it to the internal memory Snapshot 7 5 Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium Media 7 3 Detect the external storage medium in the drive Available on models with the Ethernet interface regardless of whether an external storage drive is installed USER Key Operation Press the USER key once to perform the assigned action in operation mode or setting mode It does not operate in basic setting mode except the Snapshot action which operates in
65. cs 03 BED 812 816 Time No Nessage Oct 84 2883 16 48 04 681 Oct 44 2683 16 39 53 089 Oct Bd 2883 16 39 49 681 Oct 4 2683 16 39 14 681 Measured data have been Press FUNC key to logi Measured data have been Measured data have been Error message Error code Date and time of occurrence The total number of inputs on this instrument capacity of the internal memory communication functions external storage drive options MAC address and the firmware version number can be displayed Number of measurement channels ANALOG 6 HATH 12 HENORY 1260000 Number of computation channels OPTION Internal memory capacity REMOTE PULSE RS 232 ETHERNET Optional functions ALARM 4 PRODUCT External storage medium HAC address 00 00 64 81 93 38 t _ MAC address 8 83 Version Firmware version number 1 56 1 9 Other Functions Displayed Language The displayed language can be set to English Japanese German or French Snapshot The image data displayed on the screen can be saved to the external storage medium through key operation The data is in PNG format and can be pasted to commercially sold software programs such as document creation software Note This function is available on the following models e Models with an external storage drive or e Models with the Ethernet communication interface C7 option tha
66. data gt 9 or 1 soft key select Clear data For models with no external storage drive From the operation display use the above keys to open the following dialog box ISP Save settings Load settings A Are you sure you want to clear Heasure date Delete 8 Format 9 Clear data Operations on the Display Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The data is cleared To cancel the operation select No using the right arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key Note The data acquired in the internal memory is also cleared when memory related settings are changed in basic setting mode In this ca he following confirmation dialog box appears Setup Mode Basic setting mode as Option Do you want to store and make the new settings take effect BE wo cancer 7 20 7 9 Saving and Loading Setup Data This section explains how to save the setup data to the external storage medium and how to change the settings by loading the setup data from the external storage medium Saving Setup Data Loading Setup Data of Setting Mode lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Operation Display e Saving setup data MENU key switch to setting mode gt 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data gt 1 soft key select Save settings From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following display pet bs 2003 09 52 30 MELO Save settings File name ay File name Time
67. engineering such as decompiling of the software is strictly prohibited No portion of the software supplied by us may be transferred exchanged sublet or leased for use by any third party without prior permission by us Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or missing or if there is physical damage contact the dealer from which you purchased them This instrument When you open the operation key panel on the front panel a name plate is located on the back side of the cover Check that the model name and suffix code given on the name plate on the rear panel match those on the order f P AX Donotremove ODAN STYLE the cover SUFFIX Repair by trained s i NO personal only Models and Options Conventions used Description in this manual 3 ch model Number of inputs for measurement 3 ch 6 ch model Number of inputs for measurement 6 ch 12 ch model Number of inputs for measurement 12 ch External storage No external memory medium FDD Compact flash memory card with medium Displayed language English German French display Options Alarm output relays 2 points Alarm output relays 4 points Alarm output relays 6 points RS 232 interface including Modbus protocol 2 RS 422 A 485 interfac
68. enter any of the conditions listed below within the relevant time period one hour for hourly reports for example a symbol that indicates the condition is output to the report Data Condition Symbol Common to measurement and computation channels Measurement error or computation error E For measurement channels Positive over range O Negative over range O Burnout Positive over range B Burnout Negative over range B For computation channels Positive computation overflow when the value exceeds 3 4E 38 O Negative computation overflow when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O For a description on positive negative over range see page 1 20 Power failure Time change Symbol Power failure P Time change C 1 48 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option Numerical Display The range of displayed values of report data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the lower limit span of the computation channel However special displays are used for cases given in the table below e Measurement channel Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Displayed value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN INST Whenall data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value Positive ove
69. enter these settings first Mode Types Description Main Operations Possible Operation mode Mode used to conduct measurement Display measured data Contains a screen for displaying the e Save or abort the saving of the measured data operation history etc measured data Setting mode Mode used to set parameters that are Set the operation of the changeable during measurement measurement functions e Set items related to the display format Basic setting mode Mode used to set basic items such as Set basic items of each function the input format and the data storage Set communication parameters format You cannot switch to basic e Initialize the internal memory setting mode while data acquisition or computation is in progress Some of the items such as the input range or computation settings cannot be changed during data acquisition to the internal memory or during computation Display Transition Diagram Operation Mode Setting Mode Basic Setting Mode End soft key gt DISP ENTER key Setup Node tne at i ii i Set node Hold down Basic setting sode lt MENU key Bl ten the FUNC Ei am arz X Pima MENU key vs Hessage Gi Henory end trend tewory timeup KE ext 173 MENU key Soft key ESC key Power ON is na igus Setup Node tine Last CH BI Alara Range Ret lash Hode Range Spent Span Relay AnD None vort a 2 e00 2 000 Action Energize Setting screens Setting s
70. file that contains manual sampled data from channels 1 2 3 and 4 MANUAL SAMPLE DATA Model Serial No 12A338617 n File Header Processl Lot2 CH TAG CHO1 a CHO2 Ti CHOS3 CH04 i UNIT p V ey AN p UN r mv r 2000 01 01 01 08 43 0 000 0 000 0 000 14 00 2000 01 01 01 08 48 0 000 0 000 0 000 14 00 2000 01 01 01 09 15 0 000 0 000 0 000 14 00 CH TAG 1 CHO1 r CHO2 y CHO3 CH04 s UNIT V Ey N i Y ty V H 2000 01 01 01 15 30 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 2000 01 01 01 18 12 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 014 App 14 Appendix 5 Data Formats of ASCII Files Note Output value when detected erroneous data measurement over range data or computation overflow data Channels Data Output value Measurement channels measurement error Blank positive over range including burnout 99999 negative over range including burnout 99999 Computation channels computation error 999999999 positive computation overflow 999999999 negative computation overflow 99999999 CH TAG and UNIT lines In the following cases both the CH TAG line and the UNIT line are rewritten after a carriage return line feed and followed by manual sampled data e When the measurement channel is switched from some setting other than Skip to Skip e When the measurement channel is switched from Skip to some other setting e Wh
71. following figure Follow the procedures below to enter the characters Procedure Operation Keys 1 Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the position you wish to enter a character 2 Use the up and down arrow keys to select a character you wish to enter on the character keypad The selected character is displayed at the cursor position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change all characters you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key The character entry pop up window disappears and the character is set To cancel the settings and clear the character entry pop up window press the ESC key Cursor blue Select the input position using the left and right arrow keys Character entry pop up window Character keypad ABCDEFGHIS Select the input character using KIL HINI 0 PARIS T the up and down arrow keys UVWXYZ Displayed character type Overwrites or Inserts a over EAJ Overwrites the cursor position Aa Del T E inserts at the cursor position Ins soft key Switches between insert and overwrite Bs soft key Deletes the character before the cursor position Del soft key Deletes the character at the cursor position A a 1 soft key Switches character types EH Upper case alphabet E Lower case alphabet EE Numbers Lower case alphabet Numbers 0123456789 abcecdefghij klmnoparst uvwxyz8 EASE Over 3 9 suo eiado uowwo
72. function of this instrument see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 Code Message 280 IP address is not set or FTP function is not available Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280 Character String and Details HOSTADDR The DX s IP address has not been specified Check the IP address DORMANT Internal processing error LINK Data link is disconnected Check the cable connection 281 FTP mail box operation error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 281 Character String and Details MAIL Internal processing error STATUS Internal processing error TIMEOUT Internal processing error PRIORITY Internal processing error NVRAM Internal processing error 282 FTP control connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 282 Character String and Details HOSTNAME Failed the DNS lookup search the IP address corresponding to the host name Check the DNS setting and the destination host name TCPIP Internal processing error UNREACH Failed to connect to a control connection server Check the address setting and that the server is running OOBINLINE Internal processing error NAME Internal processing error CTRL The control connection does not exist Check that the server does not drop the conn
73. group containing the channel selected using the cursor 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Switching to the Trend Bar Graph Display Containing the Channel Specified Using the Cursor The operation described here is for the screen with the cursor displayed 1 Move the cursor using the arrow keys and select the channel Cursor white frame 21 5 ea EEAO e TA H 196 1 C FI 103 H 316 5 m3 h 2 Switch to the trend display or bar graph according to the procedure described in Changing the Display 5 3 Displaying Information List Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary lt Operation Mode gt For details see section 1 4 Display Function Procedure Changing the Display 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the information screen Ran shee s ALARM SUMMARY 2 Oct 05 07 54 Displays the alarm summary 400 Oct 05 08 30 MaD i o MESSAGE SUMMARY i Displays the message summary 4 m Memory summary Displays the memory summary JUMP TO HISTORY When alarm summary is displayed Displays the historical trend for when the alarm selected using the cursor occurred When message summa
74. input terminals Remote control input Specifications are the same as remote control input R1 besides the number of inputs Number of inputs 5 can be used for pulse inputs Computation function See the description of Computation Functions M1 12 11 suoneoyioeds B 12 5 Specifications of Optional Functions Remote Control Input R1 Item Specifications Number of inputs Input format Input type Non voltage contact Open collector Signal type 8 Photocoupler isolation Isolated power supply for input terminals Shared common Close less than or equal to 200 Q Open more than or equal to 100 kQ 0 5 V or less 30 mADC when turned ON leakage current of 0 25 mA or less when turned OFF Level signal or trigger signal 250 ms or longer Control actions This option allows the following functions to be controlled remotely by a contact or an open collector input Start stop of data acquisition level Trigger for event data acquisition trigger 250 ms or longer Time adjustment adjusting the internal clock to the nearest hour upon remote signal trigger 250 ms or longer Time of signal input Processing hh 00 00 to hh 01 59 Cut off reading of less than one minute e g 10 00 50 is corrected as 10 00 00 hh 58 00 to hh 59 59 Round up reading of less than one minute e g 10 59 50 is corrected as 11 00 00 hh 02 00 to hh 57 59 No process is to be performed Start stop of
75. installation and wiring procedures of this instrument Names of Parts Display Modes and Common Operations Describes the names of the parts of this instrument the basic key operations the basic operations carried out initially and how to use the external storage medium drive Measurement Input and Alarm Related Setup Operations Describes how to set the input for the measurement and alarms Operations on the Operation Screens Describes how to use the operation screens Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents Describes how to change the display format and write user defined messages Data Save Load Operations Describes how to write various data to the internal memory how to save and load from the external storage medium and the file operations on the external storage medium Computation and Report Function Related Operations M1 or PM1 Option Describes how to set and execute operations related to the computation function and report function of the computation function option Operations of Other Functions Describes the USER key key lock login logout of key operation log display alarm on internal memory remaining space and remote input setting 10 Troubleshooting Describes the error messages and the troubleshooting measures of this instrument 11 Maintenance Describes periodic inspection calibration and recommended replacement period for worn parts 12 Specifications Des
76. key operation or an alarm occurrence Note When the backlight is dimmed or completely off the backlight saver function causes it to return to its original brightness whenever you press any key on this instrument When doing so the key s primary function is not carried out 3 13 suoneiado uowwog pue s pon Aejdsig Sued Jo soweN e 3 5 Initializing the Setup Data and Clearing the Internal Memory This section explains how to initialize the setup data in the internal memory to factory default settings initial settings and how to clear the data in the internal memory For a list of initial settings see appendix 6 Initializing the Setup Data Clearing the Internal Memory lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 8 soft key select Save Load Initialize gt 5 or 1 soft key select Initialize For models with no external storage drive From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Mode Initialize Kind Initialize contents Clearl Setup settings Settings Measure amp Hath data Clear2 Settings Measure amp Math data Clear3 Measure amp Math data Clear 1 Clear 2 Clear 3 Setup Procedure 1 Press the soft key corresponding to the action you wish to carry out 2 Press the DISP ENTER key Initialize Kind Tritislize rantent
77. measured value of channel 2 Multiplication x 01xKO3 Computes the measured value of channel 1 multiplied by constant KO3 Division 01 K02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 divided by constant K02 Note When you set an expression as e g 31 01 on channel 31 the summation of channel number 1 will be displayed in channel 31 Power SQR ABS LOG EXP Computations The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants KO1 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can nest a computing element inside the parentheses of another computing element EXAMPLE Power xx 01xx02 Raises measured value of channel 1 to the power of measured value of channel 2 Square root SQR SQR 01 Returns the square root of the measured value of channel 1 Absolute value ABS ABS 01 Returns the absolute value of the measured value of channel 1 Logarithm LOG LOG 01 Returns the common logarithm of the measured value of channel 1 Exponent EXP EXP 01 Raises e to the power of the measured value of channel 1 Note The natural logarithm is not directly provided but can be obtained by using the following logex logiox logioe as logpx logax logab Therefore to calculate the natural logarithm of the value of channel 01 set KO1 1 Then the expression will become LOG 01 LOG EXP K01 App 7 xipueddy 3 Appendi
78. message Media has not been inserted appears 7 9 suoljeiedo peo anes erd 7 3 Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Only for Models with an External Storage Medium Drive This section explains how to save the measured data to the external storage medium Saving Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium When Auto Save is Specified lt Operation Mode gt Procedure Insert an external storage medium into the drive When starting the writing of data to the internal memory the data in the internal memory is automatically saved to the external storage medium The data is saved to the directory specified in section 7 1 Note Do not remove the external storage medium while it is being accessed For the memory usage display of the internal memory see section 1 4 To check the free space on the storage medium see section 7 7 Be aware that data in the internal memory will be overwritten if there is not enough free space on the external storage medium or if the storage medium is not inserted in the drive in the following cases When the number of display data files exceeds 16 A file is created for each auto save interval see section 7 1 When the event data are acquired to the internal memory in the free mode and the number of files exceeds 16 A file is created at specified acquisition periods data length see section 7 1 When the External Storage Medium Has Insufficient Space T
79. points of the display data event data that can be acquired and the sampling length Use the information when determining the amount of time it takes for the internal memory to become full or when deciding the channels to be acquired or the sampling interval The possible range of menus of the auto save interval of display data and the data length of event data is displayed in the soft keys based on the information described here Maximum Sampling Length Data Format The display data have minimum and maximum values for each sampling interval Event data consists of instantaneous values The number of data bytes per channel is shown in the following table Data Type Measurement Channel Computation Channel Display data 4 bytes channel 8 bytes channel Event data 2 bytes channel 4 bytes channel e Example Data format when the data of measurement channels 1 to 4 and a computation channel 31 are acquired Display data 1st scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max 2nd scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max to nth scan CH1 CH1 CH2 CH2 CH3 CH3 CH4 CH4 CH31 CH31 min imax min max min max min max min max WY 2 bytes binary data Event data 1st scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 2nd scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31 to nth scan CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH31
80. position corresponds to the position of the decimal point of the upper and lower limit span of the computation channel However special displays are used for cases given in the table below Data Condition Computation Display The computed result exceeds 99999999 positive over display range Over The computed result is below 9999999 negative over display range Over The value exceeds 3 4E 38 or is below overflow Over or 3 4E 38 in the middle of computation Over An error is detected error Over When the following computation is specified acomputation error occurs e X 0 SQR X e LOG X e When a skipped channel No is entered in the equation The number of stacks inthe equation error Over exceeds 17 Channel constants K communication input data C remote pulse input D 1 43 suoloun jo uoneuejdxg 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option e Computation data dropout Computation data dropout occurs when the computation is not completed within the scan interval e The computation icon displayed in the status display section turns yellow e Whencomputation data are acquired to the internal memory the data immediately before a computation drop out are substituted for the computation data at the time of the dropout e When this occurs frequently lower the CPU load by reducing the number of computation channels or making the scan interv
81. ree be eee E eer er Peer ere eee eon rr rrr ie 1 8 i4 Display FUMCHON o cczcacescetesacetenauncecadeccegssceadstesedvsges ea aaa a ar a Oa 1 13 1 5 Data Storage Function avi naninaainiinditnndi a a a NEA 1 28 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option ecceeceeeeeeereeenees 1 42 1 7 FAIL Memory End Output Function F1 Option essesesseeseeseeeseeseeeieenesresiresresinsrssrnenns 1 50 1 8 Remote Control Function R1 PM1 Option sseesseeseeseeseeeneeeesneseerennernsensneennsereeenenne 1 52 WO TOTS UOS a a E a a e onic Meade a aaa aoaia 1 55 Installation and Wiring 2 1 Handling PreCautioms i cc cuitcidcccpavide lavtaccieslonetssaebbasdeiesssites sveecsuyes Ae NE EEEE 2 1 2 2 Installato i rper aei erae n Aa T ESO N E 2 2 2 3 Measurement Input Terminal Wiring 0 0 0 2 eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeesaeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeenneeesnaeees 2 5 2 4 Optional Input Output Terminal Wiring eceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeesieeeeeeeee 2 8 25 Wiring the Power SUPPLY wicise Adeeeens desi tem AA E ieee 2 12 Names of Parts Display Modes and Common Operations 3 1 Names of Parts and FUNCOMS cscccecccctcec cscs ciceecuetecenesceecata isea E 3 1 32 Basie Key Operation sssr esien r E E Eea eee I Er 3 3 3 3 Setting the Date and Time esisiini eneren ariana enan ana a aiaa 3 10 3 4 Setting the Brightness of the Display and the Backlight Saver Function ee 3 13 3 5 Initializing the Setu
82. sampling length When acquiring display data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 12 the number of computing channels is 12 and the display rate is 30 min div 60 sec sampling interval then Number of data per channel 1 200 000 bytes 12 x 4 bytes 12 x 8 bytes 8 333 data Maximum number of data points is 100 000 Maximum sampling length 8 333 x 60 sec 500 000 sec approx 5 7 days When acquiring event data only If we assume that the number of measuring channels is 12 the number of computing channels is 12 and the sampling interval is 1 sec then Number of data per channel 1 200 000 bytes 12 x 2 bytes 12 x 4 bytes 16 667 data Maximum number of data points is 120 000 Maximum sampling length 16 667 x 1 sec 16 667 sec approx 4 6 hours When acquiring both display data and event data The sampling length is calculated by defining the capacity for display data as 900 000 bytes and the capacity for event data as 300 000 bytes The method of calculation is the same as shown above Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 Manual Sampled Data Item Specifications Objective channels All channels Data acquired Data when manual sampling operation is carried out Format ASCII Trigger Key operation communication command option or remote input signals option Max number of data sets internal memory can hold 50 TLOG Data option Item Specifications Obje
83. section 2 1 Handling Precautions Inserting the Storage Medium 1 Pull open the key panel toward you while pushing down on the tab in the upper middle part of the panel Insert a external storage medium to the drive and push in until you hear a click Open the operation key panel Floppy Disk CF Memory Card For Compact Flash Memory Card The CF memory card is detected and an icon that the CF memory card has been inserted appears in the status display section of the screen ie V um y Q For Floppy Disk Go to step 2 2 Press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 3 9 Inserting and Ejecting the External Storage Medium 3 Press the Media soft key The floppy disk is detected and the icon indicating that the floppy disk has been inserted appears in the status display section of the screen H H 1 Hedia AlarmACK Message ERUR Next 1 3 sample Note Keep the operation key panel closed at all times during operation except when inserting or ejecting the external storage medium The operation key panel protects the external storage medium and the drive from foreign particles such as dust Ejecting the External Storage Medium 1 If this instrument is turned ON check that the external storage medium is not being accessed Note e The access lamp illuminates while the external storage medium is being accessed e If the data in the internal memory is being saved to the ext
84. setting mode 1 Select the file to be loaded from the file list of the external storage medium using the up and down arrow keys 2 Press the DISP ENTER key The setup data is loaded When the data is loaded the settings are changed and this instrument returns to the operation mode Press the ESC key to cancel the operation and return to the Save Load Clear data menu Setup Items Saving Setup Data All the setup data of both modes setting mode and basic setting mode are stored e Set the file name using up to 8 alphanumeric characters The following character strings cannot be used AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK and strings containing spaces A pnl extension is automatically added to the file name of the setup data e The size of a setup data file is approximately 16 KB at maximum Loading Setup Data of Setting Mode Loading the data in setting mode loads only the setup data of setting mode To load all of the setup data of setting mode and basic setting mode load the setup data in basic setting mode e The contents of the loaded setup data that are inconsistent with the content of the basic setting mode of this instrument will not be loaded e Ifthe contents of the loaded setup data are invalid refer to the error message log that appears by pressing the FUNC key and soft keys For the procedure of displaying the error message log see section 9 4 Saving Setup Data Loading Setup Data lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Operation
85. specified Only a single sender is allowed 100 IP address doesn t belong to class A B or C Check the settings Confirm the settings with the network administrator 101 The result of the masked IP address is all Os or 1s Check the settings Confirm the settings with the network administrator 102 SUBNET mask is incorrect Check the settings Confirm the settings with the network administrator 103 The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP address Check the settings Confirm the settings with the network administrator 104 FTP client failed because the memory mode is manual Select auto save to transfer files via FTP See section 7 1 e Execution Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 150 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress Stop data acquisition See section 7 2 151 This action is not possible during sampling or calculating Stop data acquisition and or computation See sections 7 2 and 8 2 152 This action is not possible because saving is in progress Wait till the saving ends 153 This action is not possible because formatting is in progress Wait till the formatting ends 155 The message is not written while sampling is stopped Start data acquisition first See sections 6 4 and 7 2 160 Cannot load the specified data Change the memory setting Load display data when display data is set to be acquired Load event data when event
86. the consecutive auto save interval starts from the time this operation is carried out However if the date and time to save data is specified the date and time will not be changed by the key operation to save data Saving Data in the Internal Memory to the External Storage Medium When Manual Save is Specified lt Operation Mode gt This procedure saves data at arbitrary timing when manual saving is specified for measured or computed data Procedure For CF Memory Card 1 Insert a CF memory card to the drive A confirmation window appears Press the DISP ENTER key with Yes is selected Measured data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium Remove the CF memory card from the drive after the data save is finished When a CF memory card has been in the drive 1 Press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display Press the Media soft key A confirmation window appears Press the DISP ENTER key with Yes is selected Measured data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium Remove the storage medium from the drive after the data save is finished For Floppy Disk ih 2 Insert a floppy disk to the drive Press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display Press the Media soft key A confirmation window appears Press the DISP ENTER key with Yes is selected Measured data in the internal memory is s
87. the files on the external storage medium can be retrieved for storage For details on these functions see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 1 41 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option Computation Function Equations can be written to computation channels by using the measured data or computed data as variables The result of the computation can be displayed or stored Computation is performed at the scan interval Computation Channels You can use 12 computation channels channel 31 to channel 42 Types of Computations In the table below y represents the computed result X and n generally represent the measured data and a constant Type Description Four arithmetical operations Addition subtraction multiplication x and division xX Determines the power y X SQR Determines the square root ABS Determines the absolute value LOG Determines the common logarithm y log 10X EXP Determines the exponent y e Relational computation Determines lt lt gt Of two elements and outputs 0 or 1 Logical computation Determines the AND logical product OR logical sum XOR exclusive logical sum of two elements NOT negation of an element and outputs O or 1 TLOG computation Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P
88. the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Po Setting Items Pulse Input Terminals The pulse input terminal numbers are 6 7 and 8 The initial setting is Pulse You can use them as the remote input terminals if you set actions other than Pulse Also you can set the terminal numbers to 1 through 5 and use them as the pulse input terminals See section 2 2 Wiring for more information on wiring the pulse input terminals Note e Each pulse input terminal numbers 6 through 8 has a common terminal L The remote input terminals numbers 1 through 5 share a common terminal e The remote input terminals numbers 1 through 5 are isolated from the pulse input terminals numbers 6 through 8 4 3 Setting Pulse Input PM1 Option Pulse Input Measurement Example Pulses are counted and displayed using computation channels This is a description of the settings for the application example below For the setting procedure of the computation channels see section 8 1 For a description on computation function see section 1 6 Application Example 1 Pulse Sum Value Numbe
89. the acquisition time amount of memory used with respect to the data length of the specified event data When pretrigger is specified and START is pressed causing this instrument to enter the trigger wait state data of size equal to the pretrigger amount is acquired to the internal memory At this point the bar is displayed in orange After acquiring the data of size equal to the pretrigger the length of the bar stays fixed However the relevant data is updated until the trigger condition is met When the trigger condition is met the bar turns green Data is acquired to the internal memory after the pretrigger data If data acquisition to all blocks is finished in Trigger mode Full or F is displayed in the bar When Full or F is displayed event data is not acquired to the internal memory even if the trigger condition is met For the description of trigger mode and rotate mode see section 1 5 Data Storage Function e Block display When the event data acquisition area is divided into multiple blocks the block usage is displayed White blocks Blocks with no data Green blocks Block containing data that was acquired to the internal memory after starting the current acquisition of event data Gray blocks Blocks containing previous data suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 4 Display Function For models without storage medium drive Only the items below differ from For models with a storage medium drive
90. trip line that can be displayed on the trend screen Trip Line lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 1 soft key select Group set Trip line From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Snt 05 2003 09 40 55 OF It Group number fr Group set Group name GROUP 1 CH set 01 02 03 04 05 06 Trip line Position Color 108 ia Red lore ort f On Off Setup Procedure 1 With the cursor blue located at the Group number box select the group number for setting the trip line using the soft keys The cursor moves to the Group name box 2 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the On Off box under Trip line A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 3 Press the On or Off soft key The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 4 Ifyou select On set Position and Color using the soft keys arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key Note The Position is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to enter all the trip lines you wish 6 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item Setup Items Trip Lines e Group number Select the group you wish to set
91. type of report to be created from the following Hour Create hourly reports Day Create daily reports Hour Day Create hourly and daily reports Day Week Create daily and weekly reports Day Month Create daily and monthly reports Ave Inst Select whether output average value or instantaneous value Ave the average value from the interval for the report Inst the instantaneous value when the report is created Date Day of the week Set the date or day of the week on which the report is to be created If Report set is set to Day Month Date is displayed If Day Week is specified Day of the week is displayed If Hour Day or Hour Day is specified Date is displayed However this setting is void e Date for monthly reports Enter the date 01 to 28 You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 e Day of the week for weekly reports Select the day of the week Time hour Set the time when the report is to be created The reference time is set in the range of 0 00 to 23 00 at 1 hour steps Hourly reports are created on the hour so the Time hour setting is disabled Report CH Select the report channel R01 to R12 to which measurement computation channels are assigned The data of measurement computation channels are output in order according to this number Off On Select whether to use the report channel On or Off Channel Set the measurement or computation channel to assign to the report channel All measurement and comp
92. value is displayed in the Value box 8 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags Tag 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the First CH and Last CH boxes 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the start and end channel numbers for setting the tag 3 Move the cursor blue to the Tag box using the arrow keys 4 Press the Input soft key A pop up window appears 5 Enter the tag using the soft keys and arrow keys 6 Press the DISP ENTER key The input tag is displayed in the Tag box Computation Channels First CH Last CH You can assign channel numbers 31 to 42 as computation channels The range of numbers here is used to set the range of channels for setting the computation function Math Turn ON OFF the computation function for the computation channels specified by First CH and Last CH Calculation expression Set the equation up to 40 characters according to the description given on the equation pop up window For a description on how to create equations see appendix 2 Meaning and Syntax of Computing Equations Span_Lower Span_Upper Set the upper and lower limits of the computation span range of computed values Selectable range of values and the decimal place are as follows Selectable range of values 9999999 to 99999999 Selectable decimal places X XXXX XX XXX XXX XX XXXX X Note You cannot set Soan_Lower and Span_Upp
93. viii Contents Chapter 6 Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 6 8 6 9 6 10 6 11 6 12 Change the Group Settings ceceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeseaeeseeeeeeeseaeseeesiaeeeeeeeeaten 6 1 Displaying Tag Names for Channels 0ceceeseeee eee eee cee eeee cee eeee eee eaeseseaeseaeeaeeeeeeeeats 6 3 Changing the Display Update Rate of the Trend Screen ececeeee ee eee teeeeeeeeeeees 6 5 Writing Messages on the Trend Screen ecee cece eee eee eee eceeeeee tees sae teas seeeeaeteeeeaeteeee 6 6 Displaying a Line to Indicate a Particular Value of Interest Trip Line ON the Trend SCreen sinosus dans vite viay vel a iadaa iaa NEEE ENE ESAE Eni 6 8 Changing the Channel Display Color eee ee cece e cece teases eeae tees eaeeeaeeeeeaeenaetats 6 10 Displaying Waveforms in Separate Zones on the Trend Screen n se 6 12 SMUG TING Call Os TAEAE A T 6 13 Setting the Waveform Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width and Grid mearra cas cece Sonccicdd det an vxteeawande dats sebseetoevseds aa Mas sasuasenseravarscecaes 6 16 Changing the Display of Bar Graphs eeceecceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeseaeeseeeeeaeetiaee 6 18 Switching the Displayed Groups Automatically at a Specified Time Interval Scroll TUM a cescases heciives cos ea a a E AE aa E EERE 6 20 Dis
94. when the value falls below 3 4E 38 O Measurement computation errors are discarded when MAX and MIN are determined Measurement computation errors over range and computation overflow are discarded when determining AVE and SUM The report output values of AVE or INST MAX MIN and SUM vary depending on the data condition of the measurement and computation channels as shown in the table below Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN INST When all data are measurement errors Blank Maximum value Positive over range 99999 minimum value Negative over range 99999 instantaneous value SUM e When all data are measurement errors or over Blank Sum value range e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Report Output Value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN INST When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value When the minimum value is below 9999999 99999999 instantaneous value SUM e When all data are computation errors or Blank Sum value computation overflow e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 e When t
95. with A sequence number added to the character string specified here The sequence number is incremented every time data is saved For example if the specified directory name is DATAO the first key operation saves the data to the DATAO A00 directory The second key operation saves the data to the DATAO A01 directory Note e When the directory name is changed the sequence number is reset to zero e When the data are divided and saved over multiple external storage media due to lack of space on the storage medium the same directory name is used Save data only when Save is set to Manual Set how data is to be saved in manual save mode Select All which saves all the data in the internal memory or Unsave which saves only the data that has not been saved The data that is saved is display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data M1 PM1 option and report data M1 PM1 option suoljeiedo peoanes erd 7 2 Starting Stopping the Acquisition to the Internal Memory Starting the Acquisition to the Internal Memory lt Operation Mode gt Starting the Acquisition to the Internal Memory Press the START key When data acquisition to the internal memory starts the internal memory icon changes from stop indication to run indication as shown below Internal memory icon VA 204 Explanation Actions that starts at the same time The start operation of the acquisition to the internal
96. 00 37500 35294 33333 31579 30000 28571 27273 46154 42857 40000 37500 35294 33333 31579 30000 28571 27273 26087 25000 40000 37500 35294 33333 31579 30000 28571 27273 26087 25000 24000 23077 COINI OD aAl R wol ml o 35294 33333 31579 30000 28571 27273 26087 25000 24000 23077 22222 21429 o 31579 30000 28571 27273 26087 25000 24000 23077 22222 21429 20690 20000 28571 27273 26087 25000 24000 23077 22222 21429 20690 20000 19355 18750 i 26087 25000 24000 23077 22222 21429 20690 20000 19355 18750 18182 17647 N 24000 23077 22222 21429 20690 20000 19355 18750 18182 17647 17143 16667 App 4 Appendix 1 Time Estimate for Writing Display Event Data to the Internal Memory Table 3 Display data when acquiring dispaly data and event data Number of Number of Measurement Channels Computation Ch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0 75000 75000 75000 56250 45000 37500 32143 28125 25000 22500 20455 18750 1 75000 56250 45000 37500 32143 28125 25000 22500 20455 18750 17308 16071 2 45000 37500 32143 28125 25000 22500 20455 18750 17308 16071 15000 14063 3 32143 28125 25000 22500 20455 18750 17308 16071 15000 14063 13235 12500 4 25000 22500 20455 18750 17308 16071 15000 14063 13235 12500 11842 11250 5 20455 18750 17308 16071 15000 14063 13235 12500 11842 11250 10714 10227 6 17308 16071 15000 14063 13235 12500 11842 11250 10714 10227 9783 9375 7 1
97. 01 only l01 102 101 and 102 l01 103 101 to 103 101 104 101 to 104 101 105 101 to 105 and 101 106 101 to 106 Only the relays that can be used on the installed alarm option terminal block A1 A2 or A3 option are valid Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON the relays 101 to 103 are fixed to OR logic operation AND setting is invalid e Action Select whether the alarm output relay is energized Energize or de energized De_energize when an alarm occurs This setting applies to all alarm output relays e Behavior Select one of the following output relay behaviors when the alarm condition switches from an alarm activated condition to an alarm released condition normal condition The setting applies to all alarm output relays If the alarm output relay option is not installed the setting is disabled e Nonhold initial value Turn OFF output relay when the alarm is released e Hold Hold the output relay at ON until an alarm output release alarm ACK operation is performed Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON the relays 101 to 103 are fixed to Non hold behavior Hold setting is invalid Indicator Select the alarm indication behavior when the alarm condition switches from an alarm activated condition to an alarm released condition from the following e Nonhold initial value Clear the alarm indication when the alarm is released e Hold Hold the alarm indication until an alarm output rel
98. 1 The value of channel 31 is multiplied times 4 and the number of pulses per second is calculated Constant K01 4 Note When displaying the number of pulses per minute the rolling average on channel 31 is set as follows and channel 32 is set to 240 times that of the value of channel 31 KO1 240 Interval 250 ms Number of samples 240 4 14 Chapter 5 Operations on the Operation Screens 5 1 Displaying Measured Data in Waveform Numerical Values or Bar Graph Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Trend Screen Waveform Display lt Operation Mode gt For details see section 1 4 Display Function Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the trend screen M GROUP 1 to GROUP 4 Displays group 1 to 4 The specified group name is displayed in place of GROUP1 to GROUP4 ALL CHANNEL Displays the waveform of all the channels See Explanation Tio Lo iL F GROUP CHANNEL Displays the waveforms of the channels registered to groups SCALE ON Displays the scale See Explanation SCALE OFF Clears the scale alte L GS Cy y Screen menu Sub menu DIGITAL OFF i i Clears the numerical display section DIGITAL ON Displays the numerical display section
99. 12563 DDS 7011256A DDS Two display data files which sampling started on July 1st 2003 at 12 56 App 13 xipueddy 3 Appendix 5 Data Formats of ASCII Files This section describes the data format of the ASCII file This instrument creates two types of ASCII files and the manual sampled data file Data Format of the Manual Sampled Data File e The manual sampled data are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas e The channel tag unit and manual sampled values are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF e The manual sampled data are appended to the file for each manual sample operation Syntax MANUAL SAMPLE DATA CRLF Model Serial No IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII CRLF File Header HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH CRLF CH TAG ccccccecccccccece ccccccececcccecc cccccecccccccccc CRLF uuuuuu CRLF yonn nCRLF UNIT uuuuuu uuuuuu 2 yyyy mo dd hh mi ss nnn n nnn n III I Serial number of this instrument 16 characters HHH H File header 82 characters ccc Channel number or tag name 16 characters uuuuuu Unit 6 characters yyyy mo dd Date when the setup file is created hh mi ss Time when the setup file is created nnn en Measured computed value measured value 8 characters computed value 10 characters File Output Example The following example shows a
100. 16 Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 1 Scale position Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The Zone Lower Upper is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Setting Zone Lower Upper e First CH Last CH Set the target channel common with the Graph setting Measurement channels 01 to 12 computation channels 31 to 42 M1 PM1 option e Zone Lower Upper Set the zone for displaying the target channel You can set Zone Lower and Zone Upper as a position when taking the maximum display width to be 0 to 100 in the following range Zone Lower 0 to 95 Zone Upper 5 to 100 Note e Lower must be a smaller value than Upper e The width of the zone upper limit lower limit must be greater than or equal to 5 6 12 6 8 Setting the Scale This section explains how to set the scale division on trend bar graph displays and the scale display position of e
101. 2 assuming 101 is assigned L Channel 3 ee 1 g r 101 output Output relay piy option lle min Approx 500 ms Approx 500 ms x 101 output Output relay put option If you set the reflash alarm relays 101 to 103 become dedicated to reflash alarms regardless of the number of alarm output relay points Therefore 101 to 103 operate as OR logic and non hold regardless of the settings made in AND OR of alarm output relays and Hold Non hold operation of the alarm output relay on the next page AND OR of Alarm Output Relay When sharing an alarm output relay among multiple alarms you can select from the following conditions that cause the alarm output relay to be activated AND Activated when all alarms are being generated simultaneously e OR Activated when at least one of the alarms is being generated Alarm status Alarm relay status Channel 1 F E I 1 I j chamei A LL j L i i i E i AND SE E ee Specify the alarm output relay to operate under the AND condition as in I01 first relay to Ixx where xx is the relay number Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 are set to OR logic operation Specifying AND produces no effect suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 3 Alarm Function Energize or De energize Operation of the Alarm Output Relay You can select whether to energize or de energize the a
102. 2 Displaying Tag Names for Channels Switching between Tag Name Display and Channel Number Display lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 5 soft key select Aux Time zone AUX Tag Channel Hemory alarm lh Language English Partial Not Time zone Difference from GMT a Media FIFO Off Tag Channel Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Tag Channel A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Switching between Tag Name Display and Channel Number Display e Tag Channel Tag Shows tag names However channel numbers are shown for those channels that tag names are not defined Channel Shows channel numbers 6 4 6 3 Changing the Display Update Rate of the Trend Screen This section
103. 333 30000 27273 25000 23077 21429 60000 50000 42857 37500 33333 30000 27273 25000 23077 21429 20000 18750 42857 37500 33333 30000 27273 25000 23077 21429 20000 18750 17647 16667 33333 30000 27273 25000 23077 21429 20000 18750 17647 16667 15789 15000 27273 25000 23077 21429 20000 18750 17647 16667 15789 15000 14286 13636 23077 21429 20000 18750 17647 16667 15789 15000 14286 13636 13043 12500 20000 18750 17647 16667 15789 15000 14286 13636 13043 12500 12000 11538 oJ JNISJAJ AJ JNJjJ o 17647 16667 15789 15000 14286 13636 13043 12500 12000 11538 11111 10714 o 15789 15000 14286 13636 13043 12500 12000 11538 11111 10714 10345 10000 14286 13636 13043 12500 12000 11538 11111 10714 10345 10000 9677 9375 13043 12500 12000 11538 11111 10714 10345 10000 9677 9375 9091 8824 M 12000 11538 11111 10714 10345 10000 9677 9375 9091 8824 8571 8333 Table 2 Event data only Number of Number of Measurement Channels Computation Ch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 120000 120000 120000 120000 120000 100000 85714 75000 66667 60000 54545 50000 120000 120000 120000 100000 85714 75000 66667 60000 54545 50000 46154 42857 120000 100000 85714 75000 66667 60000 54545 50000 46154 42857 40000 37500 85714 75000 66667 60000 54545 50000 46154 42857 40000 37500 35294 33333 66667 60000 54545 50000 46154 42857 40000 37500 35294 33333 31579 30000 54545 50000 46154 42857 400
104. 4 Blue violet 5 Brown 6 Orange 7 Yellow green 8 Light blue 9 Violet 10 Gray 11 Lime and 12 Cyan e Computation channels 31 Red 32 Green 33 Blue 34 Blue violet 35 Brown 36 Orange 37 Yellow green 38 Light blue 39 Violet 40 Gray 41 Lime and 42 Cyan To change the color select from the following 16 colors Red green blue blue violet brown orange yellow green light blue violet gray lime cyan dark blue yellow light gray and purple 6 11 s u juo peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suoneado al 6 7 Displaying Waveforms in Separate Zones on the Trend Screen This section explains how to specify the waveform display zone of each channel Waveform Display Zone lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display e Waveform display zone MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 3 soft key select Zone Graph or 6 soft key select Math Zone Graph If Aux Time Zone gt Partial is set to Use Zone Graph in the menu appears as Zone Graph Partial and the setting display shows the Partial entry box From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display For measurement channels For computation channels m1 PM1 option Ware Mato 3 First CH o1 Last cH far First CH 31 Last CH a1 Zone Zone Lower x Lower of Upper iaa Upper 100 Graph Division 10 Graph Division Bar graph Normal
105. 411 1 A guide providing simple explanations of Operation Guide operations for the recorder 6 CF memory card 9407 303 9031 1 1 Compact flash memory card 32 MB capacity and model of CF memory card may vary provided only when the external storage medium suffix code is 4 Optional Accessories Sold Separately The following optional accessories are available for purchase separately When you receive the order check that all contents are present and that they are undamaged For information and ordering contact your nearest dealer Part Name Part Number Model Note CF memory card 9407 303 90311 1 32 MB 9407 303 90311 1 64 MB 9407 303 90311 1 128 MB 9407 303 90311 1 256 MB 9407 303 90311 1 512 MB Shunt resistor 4012 151 57322 1 50 220 1 9407 310 80021 1 100 Q 0 1 9407 310 80031 1 10 2 0 1 Mounting bracket X How to Use This Manual Structure of the Manual This user s manual consists of the following sections For details on the communications functions and the software provided with the package see the respective manuals 94 99 040 75611 and 9499 040 75411 Chapter Title and Description 1 Explanation of Functions Describes in detail the functions of the instrument The chapters that explain the operation of this instrument only describe the operating procedures For more detailed information about the functions see this chapter Installation and Wiring Describes the
106. 5000 14063 13235 12500 11842 11250 10714 10227 9783 9375 9000 8654 8 13235 12500 11842 11250 10714 10227 9783 9375 9000 8654 8333 8036 9 11842 11250 10714 10227 9783 9375 9000 8654 8333 8036 7759 7500 10 10714 10227 9783 9375 9000 8654 8333 8036 7759 7500 7258 7031 11 9783 9375 9000 8654 8333 8036 7759 7500 7258 7031 6818 6618 12 9000 8654 8333 8036 7759 7500 7258 7031 6818 6618 6429 6250 Display Data Sampling Interval Display update rate 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h DIV Sampling interval s 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 for the 3 ch model only Event Data Sampling Interval 3 ch model 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 300s 600s 6 ch model 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 300s 600s 12 ch model 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 300s 600s App 5 xipueddy 3 Appendix 2 Meaning and Syntax of Equations This section describes the meaning of the computation equation and how to write them Rules for Writing an Equation Common Items Follow the rules below in writing the computing equations Use up to 40 characters to write equations The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses Specify the channels in the equation using channel numbers Example Channel 1 is 01 or 1 You can use 01 or 1 for example to specify one digit numbers for channels constants communication input data and conditions of the remote control terminals in
107. Cursor selects a message Historical trend of the data containing the selected message GR 158 91 181 48 kPa For a description on the historical trend display see page 1 26 1 24 1 4 Display Function Memory Summary The information pertaining to the display data and event data in the internal memory is displayed By selecting the display data or event data using the arrow keys the historical trend display can be recalled The number of manual sampled data TLOG data M1 PM1 option and report data M1 PM1 option residing in the internal memory are displayed For models that have the alarm output relays A1 A2 A3 option the ON OFF state of the relays are also listed Number of data sets in the internal memory The maximum number of data sets the internal memory can hold Date and time the last data were acquired Status of alarm output relays Red Activated Green Released Data type display data or event data Date and time Sampling status data acquisition Number of samplings started Date and time data acquisition ended Cursor selects a file L Manual sampled data Historical trend of the selected data TLOG data Report data For a description on display data and event data see section 1 5 For a description on the historical trend display see page 1 26 Report Data M1 PM1 Option Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed
108. Describing Operating Procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 3 through 11 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations Procedure Explanation Indicates character strings that appear on the screen Example Space soft key Volt This subsection contains the operating procedure used to carry out the function described in the current section All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind experienced users may not need to carry out all the steps Describes the details of the settings and the restrictions that exist with the operating procedure It does not give a detailed explanation of the function For details on the function see chapter 1 vii Contents Safety PRECALILONS 5s cee sccrsactzctat Seis as caus ateess Soys a S E REE E aaa ii Checking the Contents of the Package ccccecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeseaeeseeseaeeseeeeeaeeeneeeneeeeeeeeee iv How to Use This Manual 5 cecpsaseecceges ceed segediiae aca stech adeeg sgaana deck nannaa yi aa adaa vi Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions Chapter 2 A A A Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 1 1 Overview of the Paperless Recorder cecceeececesceteeeeeeeceaeeeeeseaeessaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeseeeeaees 1 1 1 2 Functions of the Input SeCtion 0 0 00 eeeceeeceeeeeeeneeceeeeeseeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeesaaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeeaeenae 1 3 tS Alarmi cot 0610 0 alee eee re ers
109. Log soft key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display Gao E e t FIP System E Mail 3 Press the System soft key The system information screen appears SYSTEM INFO z a pe aans 08 25 14 MEO e ANALOG 6 MATH 12 HEHORY 1200000 OPTION REHOTE PULSE RS 232 ETHERNET CF ALARH 4 MAC address PRODUCT HAC address 00 00 64 81 93 08 i Version 8 03 Firmware version number To return to the operation screen from the system screen press the DISP ENTER key display the screen menu gt upper lower arrow key select the desired screen gt DISP ENTER key Explanation System Information Screen You can confirm the system configuration firmware version number and MAC address of this instrument suoneiado uowwog pue s pon Aejdsiq Sued Jo soweN e 3 9 Inserting and Ejecting the External Storage Medium Procedure This section explains how to insert and eject the external storage medium You can use either type of external storage medium floppy disk or CF memory card The type of external storage medium is specified at the time of purchase CAUTION e Do not eject the external storage medium while the access lamp is illuminated This can damage the data e Do not operate the floppy disk drive in a place with vibrations or shock The disk or drive may malfunction For other information regarding the handling of the external storage medium see
110. OP 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to show the screen menu 2 Select the menu item using the up and down arrow keys 3 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu To close the sub menu that you opened press the left arrow key 4 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys 5 Press the DISP ENTER key The selected display appears To close the menu without switching the display press the ESC key fe ee Sh 616 Eg INFOR b ALARH SUMMARY fey TREND OUT 162 aS TREND OUT 102 Piya ESAE Sore FF HISTORY F 257 8 1 cia ml PI 206 Sub menu he Eral 04 084 Messase Time m PROCESS2 Oct 05 2003 08 11 30 PROCESS1 Oct 05 2003 08 02 42 START Oct 05 2003 07 55 16 START Oct 05 2003 07 54 13 iza INFOR i FAG HATION Feen TREND HISTORY 3 2 Basic Key Operations FUNC Key Operation in Operation Mode The following operation can be carried out in operation mode Menu Reference Function conditions displayed on the soft key menu Media 7 3 Detects the external storage medium in the drive only on models with a external storage drive Alarm ACK 4 2 Clears alarm display relay output valid only when the operation of the alarm display or output relay is set to hold Message 6 4 Displays messages 1 to 8 on the trend screen and writes them to the internal memory Manual sample 7 4 Acquires measured data of all channels to the internal memory Key lock 9 2 Enab
111. Off Web gt Page type gt Access control On Off Off Web gt Page type gt User name Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Web gt Page type gt Password Up to 6 alphanumeric characters lt 2 Basic E Mail Settings gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Basic E Mail settings gt SMTP server name Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Basic E Mail settings gt Port number 0 to 65535 25 Basic E Mail settings gt Recipient 1 Up to 150 alphanumeric characters Basic E Mail settings gt Recipient 2 Up to 150 alphanumeric characters Basic E Mail settings gt Sender E mail address assigned by the network administrator up to 64 alphanumeric characters lt 3 Alarm E Mail Settings gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Alarm E Mail settings gt Recipient1 On Off Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Recipient2 On Off Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Alarm1 to 4 On Off Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Include instantaneous value On Off Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Include source URL On Off Off Alarm E Mail settings gt Subject Alarm E Mail settings gt Header1 Alarm E Mail settings gt Header2 Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Alarm_summary lt 4 Scheduled E Mail Settings gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Scheduled E Mail settings gt Recipient1 On Off Off Scheduled E Mail settings gt Interval 1h 2
112. Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 2 soft key select A D From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Node A D Integrate Scan interval First CH e1 Last H or Burnout set Off RIC Internal Temperature Auto 5 Hz 68Hz 188ms Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The Volt mV that appears when the External is selected for RJC is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed 4 1 suoie1 do dn s wiejy pue yndu juowsinseoyy gt 4 1 Setting P
113. P teSt SONKOY cicera neasa TEE Key lock softkey es Logout SOKO y intsen iis series cazadceedd aa Log SOM KOY cis ccsececvesscdtszcescessieveceesvsrzssecusecseiscnsvevs sees Log softkey Manual sample soft key 0 0 cece eee eeeeeeeeeeees 7 14 Manual sample softkey eee eee eeeesseeeeeeeeeenees 3 5 Math ACK soft key Math ACK softkey Math reset Soft kEy resiirisi riisiin 8 6 Math reset softkey 5 Math START Soft KEY ninenin Math START SO KEY ssescssecstoccct sevetepsttecs csseedi eetewnenservectecned Math STOP soft key ae Math STOP SOK GY icri Media soft KOY viisiin Media softkey Message softkey Modbus master softkey Save Display soft key Save Display softkey Save Event soft key Save Event softkey Snapshot soft key Snapshot softkey System soft key trigger soft key Trigger softkey 0 0 eccsssresseeseteeees 0 C standard temperature device 0 2 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeee 11 2 A UG MOG AN TING E E Ghseasetns 4 1 abnormality in the data 1 46 1 48 AbSOlUte MOC sirsenis rt eetezeietias 1 45 absolute value 1 42 ACCESS AMP Seriese arsena e A EERS 3 2 accessorie Senan n E ents v activating The KeY OCK weet cavcsseceevsccaveve contereseedeecessarestenseiestbes adjusting the internal clock remote control 3 alarmi COMPUTATION sesei xecccec
114. PMA Proze und Maschinen Automation GmbH PMA KS3005 User s Manual ABS Abs Wert SORO Quadratwurz OC 9499 040 77311 valid from g ltig ab valable depuis 8420 Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions 2nd Edition April 2004 Thank you for purchasing the paperless recorder This manual describes the functions excluding the communications functions installation and wiring procedures operating procedures and handling precautions of the recorder To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation The following three manuals are also provided in addition to this manual Read them along with this manual Electronic Manuals Provided on the Accompanying CD ROM Manual Title Manual No Description Paperless Recorder 9499 040 75611 Describes the communication functions of the Communication Interface recorder using the Ethernet serial interface User s Manual Recorder Standard 9499 040 77411 Describes the functions and operating Software User s Manual procedure of the software that comes with the package Paper Manuals Manual Title Manual No Description Paperless Recorder 9499 040 75411 A guide providing simple explanations of Operation Guide operations for the recorder The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions Every
115. Password eee Pnl1 load POSION seizesverseessceveecs power COMPUTATION rsrsrsrsrs seriats nesenai pOwWer CONTON wivccastvteeeccettvseveencveeceestentbeavenwesteveesectvesdeeesees power supply conditions power terminals Pre thiQQel sissies protective ground terminal a EA E A A A pulse input measurement p lse input terminal sssrinin snina PUISE SUM VAU issiria rse pulse sum value reset ssessssesssrrssrsrrernesrneenerrnerarennerne R RANGO wssssceccsseceesszctvecesscengecavsceseseyesecdsaresasevsiiaeeteassars aivveieeds 4 4 NAN GC inire enea OE tatters 4 3 Rateotchanga siivcesticsssesstenvstuncsbeves catssveastensvisiicensdsnsberssanavs 4 8 POAN DANS ss cia ceas tases coaswesch sath a a aa R 3 2 recommended instrument 11 2 recommended replacement period 11 4 Ref UME anene tnana a cee aeons 8 10 reference junction COMpensation ssseseeseseriereesreernrreene 4 1 Reflash nises relational computation relative mode escseessterseees EP relay contact input Specifications isriivarisei 2 11 relay output Specifications eee ete stiraii 2 11 releasing alarm output releasing the alarm remote control cece eee 1 52 Index 3 Index releasing the KeylOCk ssiri 9 4 remaining time for Storing ccscsserssscesecrsessersneesseeeeees 9 10 remote control function 1 52 1 53 1 54 remote input a911 Report CH FO
116. Remaining Space for Storing the Display or Event Data at Which an Alarm is Activated lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 5 soft key select AUX Time zone From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Node AUX Tag Channel Channel Memory alarm Language English Partial Not Time zone Difference from GMT a Hedia FIFO Off Off ih 2h 5h Next 1 2 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Memory alarm A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Remaining Space for Storing the Display or Event Data at Which an Alarm is Activated e Memory alarm This is the minimum storage time of the internal memory at which the relay should be activated Select a val
117. Save the data when data acquisition is finished Rotate Save the data when data acquisition is finished Manual sampled data Saved when manual sampling operation is carried out TLOG data Saved when TLOG data is created Report data Saved when report data is created 12 8 12 5 Specifications of Optional Functions Alarm Output Relays A1 A2 A3 Item Specifications Action Number of outputs Relay contact rating Terminal configuration An alarm signal is output from terminals on the rear panel as a relay contact signal 2 A1 4 A2 6 A3 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A 250 VDC 0 1 A for resistive load SPDT NO C NC Energized at alarm de energized at alarm AND OR hold non hold and reflash actions are selectable RS 232 Serial Communication Interface C2 Item Specifications Connection EIA RS 232 Protocols Our private protocol Modbus protocol Synchronization method Transmission speed Start stop asynchronous transmission 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Data length 7 or 8 bits Stop bit 1 bit Parity Odd even or none Handshaking off off XON XON XON RS CS RS Modbus Mode RTU MASTER or RTU SLAVE RTU MASTER Reads data from the slave device Computation function M1 or PM1 is necessary RTU SLAVE Master device reads writes data from this instrument RS 422 A 485 Serial Communication Interface C3 Item Specifications Connection RS 422 A 485 Protocol
118. TOSISIOP serasa seceecustcieesecruesserciavess vivaaestessteieesviseresses v Skipene Snapshot snapshot s SOKOV S aaee EE Ta area specifications 3 terminal isolated RTD input ssssssisseesseesnesrnereersscens 12 11 alarn ea eare EEES 12 3 alarm output relays 12 9 COMPUTATION TUNCUONS sessi 12 10 construction data storage j dimentional draWiNgS s sssiiissiii sisisi dISplAy we scdcesseccescniens cancvouteuchdceveneserderzesceesssussntdtensdees effects of operating conditions ethernet communication interface FAIL memory end output 3 QENGrAl aisiari eira inar a oa a iE a NENS INDUL arinina venda i adaa iSolatiOm isrann eRe aA AAIE TETEA normal operating conditions PDOW r SUPPLY cessiscsctcsccctscccvesevscetecsenevacsatctsacevstecovestce Pt 1000 W RTD eee pulse measurement input remote control c eee safety and EMC standards cccccseeetseeteeeeeeeee serial communication interface ccceeeeeeeeteees 12 9 standard operation conditions 12 15 standard performance s 12 15 transport and storage conditions 12 14 speed of movement of waveform eee eect eeeeeeee 1 18 Ea i AA EE creer perrecer errerrerereeer E SQUArE TOOT serso square root computation SLACKS Ss aeiidssert casings Gans Standard ACCOSSONES sisia aaa START KEY cscs ccceczcances cecessecncezezsseeacccaseasedsceanezscescenasseeee
119. Trip line 2 dot Grid 10 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit Normal il ee ma e Next 1 2 Setup Procedure 1 w Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Brightness or Saver The selections are displayed at the bottom of the display Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to change The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item If Saver is set to On Time and Restore entry boxes appear Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Brightness of the Display Backlight Saver Function e LCD e Brightness Select a value from 1 to 8 initial setting is 2 The larger the value the brighter the display becomes Saver Select Dimmer TimeOff or NotOn do not use for the LCD backlight saver Dimmer LCD backlight is automatically dimmed TimeOff LCD backlight is automatically turned off Time Select a value from 1 min 2min 5min 10min 30min 1h initial setting is th If the specified time elapses without any key operation the LCD backlight is automatically dimmed or turned off Restore Key The backlight returns to the original brightness on a key operation Key Alm The backlight returns to the original brightness on a
120. Winter Off On When set to On the daylight savings time is enabled Summer The time is set ahead one hour at the date and hour specified for Summer Winter The time is set back one hour at the date and hour specified for Winter 3 11 suoneiedg UOWWIOD pue s pon Aejdsiq Sued Jo soweN eo 3 3 Setting the Date and Time e YY MM DD HH Enter the date and hour when the time is to be changed Year YY Specified using the lower two digits 00 to 79 represent year 2000 to 2079 80 to 99 represent 1980 to 1999 Month MM 01 to 12 Date DD 01 to 31 Hour HH 00 to 23 Note ____ When it elapsed the time set the daylight saving time is automatically turned Off Set Summer and Winter time every year 3 12 3 4 Setting the Brightness of the Display and the Backlight Saver Function This section explains how to set the brightness of the LCD and the backlight saver function used to prolong the life of the LCD backlight Brightness of the Display Backlight Saver Function lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 4 soft key select View Direction LCD From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Direction Brightness Trend Vertical Bargraph Vertical _ Saver Timedtf Background White Uog th Trend line 2 dot Restore KeytAlm
121. able Measurement Span Range 20mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50V 50 00 to 50 00 V Note For converting a current signal to a voltage signal three shunt resistors can be provided see Optional Accessories Sold Separately A 250 W shunt resistor for example is used to convert a 4 to 20 mA to a 1 to 5 V e When set to TC thermocouple input Range Selectable Measurement Span Range R 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F S 0 0 to 1760 0 C 32 to 3200 F B 0 0 to 1820 0 C 32 to 3308 F K 200 0 to 1370 0 C 328 to 2498 F E 200 0 to 800 0 C 328 0 to 1472 0 F J 200 0 to 1100 0 C 328 0 to 2012 0 F T 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F N 0 0 to 1300 0 C 32 to 2372 F WwW 0 0 to 2315 0 C 32 to 4199 F L 200 0 to 900 0 C 328 0 to 1652 0 F U 200 0 to 400 0 C 328 0 to 752 0 F WRe 0 0 to 2400 0 C 32 to 4352 F e When set to RTD resistance temperature detector Range Selectable Measurement Span Range PT Pt100 JPT JPt100 PT1K Pt1000 200 0 to 600 0 C 200 0 to 550 0 C 200 0 to 600 0 C 328 0 to 1112 0 F 328 0 to 1022 0 F 328 0 to 1112 0 F N3 option e When set to DI ON OFF input Range Selectable Measurement Span Values Level 0 Less than 2 4 V 1 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V Cont 0 Open 1 Close
122. ach channel on trend screens Scale lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display e Setting the scale division scale position of trend screens MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 3 soft key select Zone Graph or 6 soft key select Math Zone Graph From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display For measurement channels For computation channels M1 PM1 option First CH a1 Last cH far First CH 1 Last CH Br Zone Zone Lower og Lower og Upper ioo g Upper 160 g Graph Division ita Bar graph Norma Scale position 1 Graph Division Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 e Setting the number of digits displayed for the scale MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 4 soft key select View Direction LCD From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display pot 85 2003 09 42 25 OF P It View Lep Direction Brightness 2 Trend Vertical erica Saver Time0ff Bargraph vertical _ Ti th Background White ae th Trend line 2 dot Restore Key Alm Trip line 2 dot Grid 16 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit Mmmm Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for th
123. activating the alarm from the following four types Name Symbol Description High limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured computed value is greater than or equal to the alarm value Low limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured computed value is less than or equal to the alarm value Delay high limit alarm T An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified delay Delay low limit alarm t An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified delay Value Set the alarm value for the selected alarm type The selectable range is the range defined by Span_Upper Span_Lower that was specified in section 8 1 Rly Select whether relay output is enabled On or disabled Off If On is selected the Number entry box appears No Set the alarm output relay number to output the relay contact signal from the terminal on the option terminal block Selectable relays are 101 and 102 A1 option 101 to 104 A2 option or 101 to I06 A3 option For the correspondence between the output relay numbers and the positions of the terminals of the terminal blocks see pages 2 9 and 2 10 Setting the Alarm Delay Time When Type is set to T or t First CH Last CH Select the target channels for setting the alarm delay The target channels also apply to Tag TLOG and Rolling average settings A
124. age box A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the language you wish to select The Language box turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Note On Version 1 10 or later you can also select Spanish and Italian Saving the Settings 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation window appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed suo eiado uowwog pue s pon Aejdsiq Sued Jo soweN e 3 7 Changing the Time Zone This section explains how to set the time difference with respect to Greenwich Mean Time Make sure to set this value if you are using the Web server function Time Zone lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 5 soft key select Aux Time zone From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Mode AUX Tag Channel Channel Memory alarm lh Language English Partial Not Time zone Difference from GHT DE Hedia FIFO off Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Difference from GMT
125. ail settings gt Include source URL On Off Off Report E Mail settings gt Subject Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Report_data Report E Mail settings gt Header1 Report E Mail settings gt Header2 Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Up to 64 alphanumeric characters App 26 Appendix 6 List of Parameters Setting Mode GROUP 1 bct 05 2003 09 12 04 APIP GROUP 1 Sa Oct 05 2003 09 12 23 APIF BEMIS Cta Set mode a Range Alarm Tag Moving average Alarm delay time 43 Trend Save interval User key 4 Set mode Display File DST Save Load Clear data cae Time Hath set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time 9 16 11 1 Range Alarm Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value First CH 01 to 12 01 Last CH 01 to 12 01 Range gt Mode Volt TC RTD Scale Delta DI Sqrt or Skip Volt Range gt Mode Scale or Delta gt Type Volt TC RTD or DI Volt Range gt Range 20 mV 60 mV 200 mV 2 V 6 V 20 V 50 V 2V R S B K E J T N W L U Wre PT JPT PT1K Level or Cont Range gt Span _L 2 000 Range gt Span_U 2 000 Range gt Mode Delta gt Ref CH 01 to 12 01 Range gt Mode Scale or Sqrt gt Scale_L Scale_U 30000 to 30000 decimal point within 4 digits to Scale_L 0 00 the right of the decimal point Scale_U 200 00 Range gt Mode Scale or Sqrt gt Unit Up to 6 alphanumeric characters Alarm gt 1
126. al longer Alarm You can set up to 4 alarms on each computation channel The alarm types are upper limit alarm H lower limit alarm L delay upper limit alarm T and delay lower limit alarm t The hysteresis is fixed to 0 Acquiring and Saving the Computed Data Similar to measured data computed data can be acquired to the internal memory as display data or event data and saved to the external storage medium For a description on data saving see section 1 5 Data Storage Function Other Functions e Rolling average The moving average of the computed result of the equation specified for the computation channel is determined and the result is displayed as computed data for that channel The sampling interval and the number of samples can be specified for each channel The maximum sampling interval is 1 hour the maximum number of samples is 250 The initial setting is Off do not perform moving average Note e While the number of samples acquired is less than the specified number of samples the average of acquired data is computed e The computation error data are not included in the rolling average computation e Ifthe computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit the data is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the moving average is computed The upper and lower limit is 100000000 excluding the decimal point The decimal point position is the same as that of the specified value for the span lower limit e TLOG d
127. ale is 2 or 3 digits the fractional part is truncated Example If the scale is 0 1 to 100 0 the lower limit is O and the upper limit is 100 If the integer part of either end of the scale is 4 or more digits the value is displayed using a 3 digit mantissa and exponent like x10 or x10 Example If the scale is 10 to 2000 the lower limit is 1 and the upper limit is 200 x10 e The unit is displayed near the center of the scale If partial expanded display is used the display position is offset from the center When the trend is displayed vertically the number of characters that can be displayed is 6 characters or less When the trend is displayed horizontally the number of characters that can be displayed is 3 characters or less If the Scale digit is set to Fine however up to 4 characters can be displayed Number of Digits Displayed for the Scale Scale digit Yo dis u can select Normal or Fine If you select Fine the scale value can be played using 3 digits when the scale value display is 2 digits For example if the scale range is 49 0 to 51 0 the scale values are displayed using 3 digits as shown bel ow 49 01 49 6 55 0 5 4 51 4 U9 U09 peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suoneado al 6 9 Setting the Waveform Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width and Grid This section explains how to set the display direction of the trends t
128. all modes 9 1 suoljoun 19410 JO suoleiedO e 9 2 Disabling Certain Keys Keylock Function This section explains how to disable enable the key operation including data save operation in manual save mode Keys to Be Locked lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 6 soft key select Keylock From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Mode Keylock Use Not Use START Free Password STOP Free MENU Free USER Free DISP ENTER Free Alarm ACK Free _ Hath Free Write memory Free Message Mail Manual sample Hedia Free Use Not Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The Password is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The disp
129. alues of group name are as follows Group 1 GROUP 1 Group 2 GROUP 2 Group 3 GROUP 3 Group 4 GROUP 4 Group name is display in the status display section Group name e CH set Select up to six channels from measurement channels 3 ch model 01 to 03 6 ch model 01 to 06 12 ch model 01 to 12 and computation channels 31 to 42 M1 PM1 option 6 1 s u juo peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suonesado al 6 1 Change the Group Settings Enter the measurement computation channels to be assigned to the selected group according to the following rules Enter the channel number using two digits e Separate each channel with a period e Use a hyphen to specify consecutive channels Example To assign channels 1 3 and 5 through 8 enter 01 03 05 08 Note e The channels are displayed on the trend digital and bar graph screens in the order they are registered to the group e One channel can be assigned to multiple groups e Achannel cannot be assigned twice in the same group The initial value varies depending on the number of measurement inputs 3 ch model All groups 01 02 03 6 ch model All groups 01 02 03 04 05 06 12 ch model Groups 1 and 3 01 02 03 04 05 06 Groups 2 and 4 07 08 09 10 11 12 6 2 Displaying Tag Names for Channels This section explains how to set and display tag names that can be displayed in place of channel numbers Tag Name lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Displa
130. and computation channels M1 PM1 option By default the data of all measurement computation channels is set to be saved Data Acquisition isplay Data Data acquisition starts when the START key is pressed and stops when the STOP key is pressed The display data are overwritten when the display data storage area in the internal memory becomes full or the number of files exceeds 16 The number of display data files During manual save a file is created for each data write operation a set of start and stop operations During auto save a file is created every auto save interval and at every specified date time Note e The display data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary See section 5 3 When a power disruption occurs the file is closed Data Acquisition Event Data The operation differs from the mode you specified There are three modes in data acquisition Free Trigger and Rotate Free mode can be set when acquiring the event data only Mode Description Free Data acquisition is started by pressing the START key The operation is stopped by pressing the STOP key When the storage area of the internal memory becomes full or the number of files in the internal memory exceeds 16 itis overwritten The number of event data files During manual save a file is created for each data write operation start and stop operations During auto save a file is created every specified interva
131. and event data 0 9 MB for display data 0 3 MB for event data Display data Objective channels Sampling interval Data acquired Data size Format Acquisition method All channels Linked with the waveform display update rate 3 ch model 0 5 1 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200s 6 ch model 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 s 12 ch model 2 4 10 20 30 40 60 120 240 480 1200 s Max min values over the sampling intervals Measured data 4 bytes per data Computed data 8 bytes per data Binary Acquires data continuously The newest data overwrites the oldest data in the memory when the internal memory is full Event data Objective channels Sampling interval Data acquired Data size Format Acquisition method All channels 3 ch model 250 500 ms and 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 s 300 s 600 s 6 ch model 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 and 600 s 12 ch model 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 and 600 s Data at the sampling intervals Measured data 2 bytes per data Computed data 4 bytes per data Binary Free Acquires data continuously The newest data overwrites the oldest data in the memory when the internal memory is full Trigger Starts data acquisition when a specified event occurs Acquires data for a specified time No more acquisition starts when all blocks are full Rotate Starts data acquisition when a specified event occurs Acquires data for a specified time Overwrites
132. andard temperature device Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input As the measurement terminal of this instrument is generally at room temperature the actual output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive force table based on 0 C This instrument performs compensation by measuring the temperature at the input terminal and adding the corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the actual output of the thermocouple Therefore when the measurement terminal is shorted equivalent the detector tip being 0 C the measured value indicates the temperature of the input terminal When calibrating this instrument this compensation voltage thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application As shown in the figure by using the 0 C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0 C you can input the thermoelectromotive force of 0 C reference from the DC voltage standard and perform the calibration Jueu zuleN 11 3 Replacement of Parts Recommended Replacement Period To preserve the reliability of this instrument and to use this instrument in a good condition for an extended time it is recommended that periodic replacements be made on parts The following table shows the recommended replacement period for expendable parts The replac
133. arameters Related to Measurement Inputs A D Integral Time Scan Interval Burnout Detection RJC Temperature Unit Integrate Select the integral time of the A D converter Select from Auto 50Hz 60Hz and 100ms The 3 ch model however does not have a selection 100ms Auto This instrument automatically detects the power supply frequency and switches between 16 7 ms 60 Hz or 20 ms 50 Hz Fixed to 20 ms on P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply 50Hz The integral time is fixed to 20 ms 60Hz The integral time is fixed to 16 7 ms 100ms The integral time is fixed to 100 ms the scan interval is 2 s Scan interval 3 ch model Fixed to 250 ms 6 ch model 12 ch model You can select 1s or 2s However if Integrate is set to 100ms the scan interval is fixed to 2s 1s cannot be selected First CH Last CH Select the range of channels for setting the burnout detection and RJC Burnout set Set the burnout action for the measurement inputs Select Off Up or Down initial value is Off This setting is valid only for thermocouple inputs Off Burnout action Off Up When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to positive overflow and displayed as Burnout Down When the thermocouple burns out the measured result is set to negative overflow and displayed as Burnout RJC This is the reference junction compensation setting for thermocouple inputs Select either Internal
134. are of isolated input type for each channel terminal b is shorted across all channels as standard Pt 1000 Q RTD Input N3 Item Specifications Enable measurement using Pt 1000 Q RTD Measuring range 200 0 to 600 0 C 328 0 to 1112 0 F Measuring current 0 16 mA Measurement accuracy 0 2 of rdg 0 4 C Maximum resolution 0 1 C Effects of Input source resistance See Effects of Operating Conditions on page 12 16 Pulse Measurement Input Remote Input PM1 Item Specifications Pulse measurement input Number of inputs 3 expandable to 8 using remote input terminals Input format Photocoupler isolation Isolated power supply for input terminals Shared common Input type Non voltage contact Close less than or equal to 200 Q Open more than or equal to 100 kQ Open collector 0 5 V or less 30 mADC when turned ON leakage current of 0 25 mA or less when turned OFF Counting Counts rising edges of pulses Non voltage contact signal contact changes from open to closed Open collector signal input terminal level changes from High to Low Allowable input voltage 30 VDC Maximum pulse frequency 100 Hz Minimum pulse width More than or equal to 5 ms for both low close and high open durations Pulse detection period Approximately 3 9 ms 256 Hz Counting Accuracy 1 pulse Others Pulse input terminals can be used as remote input terminals Isolated between pulse input terminals and remote
135. ary see section 5 3 e Call from the screen menu Note For the procedure related to displaying measured data on the external storage medium see section 7 6 Historical Trend lt Operation Mode gt For details see section 1 4 Display Function Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the historical trend screen G 1 m lt Ri th L M GROUP 1 to GROUP 4 Displays group 1 to 4 The specified group name is displayed in place of GROUP1 to GROUP4 f E ZOOM Displays by expanding the time axis TREND see Explanation S HISTORY AE ZOOM Displays by reducing the time axis ALL CHANNEL Displays the waveform of all the channels see Explanation in section 5 1 GROUP CHANNEL Displays the waveforms of the channels registered to groups INFORMATION ON Displays the memory information CURSOR TIME ON Displays the time at the cursor position 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Scrolling the Waveforms Pressing the up or down arrow key vertical display or the left or right arrow key horizontal display while displaying the historical trend scrolls the waveform by one dot along the time axis If you keep pressing th
136. asurement inputs are assigned on the 3 ch model 6 ch and 12 ch model as shown in the figure below One measurement input uses three terminals 3 ch model 6 ch model 12 ch model 12 11 10 9 8 7 1 to 12 Measurement input channel numbers Wiring Procedure 1 Turn OFF the power to this instrument then remove the terminal cover 2 Wire the signal wire to the terminal Remove the measurement input terminal block to perform the wiring Wire gauge 0 2 2 5 mm AWG24 AWG17 Removing the terminal block Connecting Wires Hold both sides of the terminal Insert the input signal wire into the block then pull straight out slit on the underside of the terminal block then use a flathead screwdriver to tighten the front screw PG castes length rR of wire stripping 7 mm Input signal wire 2 6 2 3 Measurement Input Terminal Wiring Reattaching the Terminal Block Align the terminal block with the connectors on the main unit then push in Push completely in until it stops 3 Attach the terminal cover then fasten with screws Measurement Input Wiring Thermocouple input A m I JOO Extension leadwire DC voltage or DI input h 00O DC voltage or DI input Note Resistance temperature detector input Ah QO Leadwire resistance 10 Q max wire gt The resistance o
137. ata The instantaneous values of all channels excluding measurement channels set to Skip and computation channels set to Off can be saved at intervals specified by a timer Note TLOG computed data and TLOG data are not the same TLOG computed data refers to the result of the TLOG computation TLOG data refers to the measured computed data of all channels acquired at specified intervals 1 44 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option TLOG Computation Determines the sum maximum minimum average and maximum minimum P P values of the specified channel at specified time intervals The interval is set by timers Timer mode There are two timer modes absolute mode and relative mode e Absolute mode Timer expires at times determined from the reference time and the interval The reference time is specified by the hour 00 to 23 Example 1 Reference time 14 00 Interval 12 h The expiration time is set to 2 00 2 00 AM and 14 00 2 00 PM Example 2 Reference time 00 00 Interval 10 min The expiration time is set to 0 00 0 10 0 20 23 40 and 23 50 For example if the computation is started at 9 36 the time expiration will occur at 09 40 09 50 10 00 and so on e Relative mode The timer is started when the computation is started The timer is repeated at each interval The timer is suspended while the power is lost Example Interval 00 15 The timer expires every 15 minutes after the computa
138. ating procedure see section 5 4 You can display the historical trend of the display data or event data on the external storage medium For the operating procedure see section 7 6 Information Displayed on the Historical Trend Alarms and scales are not displayed on the historical trend display The background color of the historical trend is either black or white opposite of the background color displayed for the current trend Time axis Zoom factor of the time axis Screen switch display Inin div Display reference position P The most recent data locates Date and time at the display reference position Trip line pe Date and time at the display end position Tag Channel no 1 60 314 8 1 Unit Measured computed value Measured computed value maximum and minimum maximum and minimum value at the display value over the entire reference position display range Operation on the Historical Trend The following operations can be carried out e The waveform can be scrolled along the time axis using the the arrow keys e The time axis can be expanded or reduced e You can display all the data points of the file displayed on the historical trend display in a section of the screen all data display and specify the data that positions to the reference position using a cursor Date and time at the cursor position Cursor All data display 1 26 1 4 Display Function The information of the data being d
139. aved to the external storage medium Remove the floppy disk from the drive after the data save is finished 7 11 suoljeiedo peoanes ed 7 3 Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Only for Models with an External Storage Medium Drive Explanation Note You can select whether to save all the data residing in the internal memory or only the data that have not been saved to the storage medium See section 7 1 If saving to the storage medium is prevented with the key lock function and the key lock is enabled data cannot be saved when the medium is inserted into the drive Turn OFF the key lock before inserting the medium See section 9 2 It is possible that the data in the internal memory are overwritten before the data are stored to the external storage medium due to limitations such as the capacity of the internal memory Save the data to the external storage medium before they are overwritten For the memory usage display of the internal memory see section 1 4 Do not remove the storage medium while it is being accessed When the External Storage Medium Has Insufficient Space ale The message Exchange media to continue the saving operation appears Replace the storage medium For floppy disk press the FUNC key then press the Media soft key The message Do you want to continue to save measured data is displayed Select Yes then press the DISP ENTER key The remaining data is saved to t
140. bar graph screens The display switching interval is selectable from 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s and 1 min Backlight saver function The LCD backlight automatically dims or turns off if no key is pressed for a certain preset time can be set from 1 2 5 10 20 and 60 minutes Log display Display the logs of error messages key login logout communication interface commands file transfers via FTP operation from the Web browser and e mail transmission Display language Selectable from English German French Chinese and Japanese Temperature unit C or F selectable System screen Display the number of input points capacity of the internal memory options MAC address and firmware version number 12 5 suoneoyioeds B 12 4 Data Storage Specifications Storage Medium Item Specifications Internal memory Used for temporary data storage External storage medium Selectable from e Non e 3 5 inch floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB Compact flash memory card 32 to 512 MB Data Type Item Specifications Data type file extensions Display data dds event data dev manual sampled data dmn Setup data pnl Screen image data png On models with computation function TLOG data dtg report data dhr ddr dwr dmr Display Data Event Data Item Specifications Internal memory capacity 1 2 MB When writing both display data
141. be selectable for common to all channels Alarm information The date and time of alarm occurrences recoveries alarm types etc are displayed on the alarm summary screen 12 3 suoneoyioeds B 12 3 Display Specifications Display Unit Display Color Item Specifications Display unit 5 5 inch TFT color LCD VGA 240 x 320 dot resolution Channel display color Trend Bar graph Selectable from 16 colors Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Lightblue Violet Gray Lime Cyan Darkblue Yellow Light Gray Purple Background White or black selectable Screens Item Specifications Trend screen Direction Vertical horizontal or horizontal 2 selectable Number of indication channels 6 channels per screen maximum All channels indication 24 channels maximum including computation channels Number of group screens 4 Line width 1 2 and 3 dots selectable Display update rate Waveform 3 ch model 15 s 30 s 1 2 5 10 15 20 30 min 1 2 4 10 hours div selectable 6 ch model 1 2 5 10 15 20 30 min 1 2 4 10 hours div selectable 12 ch model 1 2 5 10 15 20 30 min 1 2 4 10 hours div selectable Display update rate Numerical value 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Waveform Numerical value numerical display section can be turned ON OFF alarm indication unit scale scale display can be turned ON OFF grid lines number of division
142. ble for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters Square root computation and linear scaling Available for Volt range Scaling limits 30000 to 30000 Decimal point user selectable Engineering unit user definable up to 6 characters 12 2 12 2 Alarm Function Specifications Item Specifications Number of alarms Up to four alarms for each channel Alarm types Upper and lower limits delay upper and lower limits difference upper and lower limits and upper limit and lower on rate of change Alarm delay time Selectable from 1 s to 3600 s for each channel Interval time of rate of change alarms The scan interval times 1 to 15 common to all channels Relay outputs option Number of points 2 4 or 6 points Relay action Energized de energized hold non hold AND OR reflash actions selectable The alarm relay condition is held even in the basic setting mode Contact rating 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A or 250 VDC 0 1 A resistive load Hysteresis On 0 5 of display span off selectable applied to upper and lower limits alarms common to all measurement channels Display The alarm status is displayed in the operation screens upon occurrence of an alarm A common alarm indication is also displayed in the status display section The alarm indication behavior non hold or hold type can
143. c Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 7 soft key select Key login From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Node Key login Use Not Auto logout Off UserID Use Not Use Number 1 On Off on User name hiserl User ID ii Password Enter setup Enable Use Not Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note ___ The User name User ID and Password are set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Setup Items Key Login e Use Not To enable the key login funct
144. c setting mode eee 3 6 key operations Setting mode 0 0 0 eccceeeesreesseesseseeeeesees 3 6 key trigger KOVIOCK irritare ne ee aeaea S EAS 9 2 keylock lt MS irasara a a N 9 3 L load the setup data remote control ssssessssessseesreeennee loading setup data cceeeeeee loading setup data of setting mode log CISDIAY x se vescsies sense ccescececsvsseasecessectasacvveceavereedtcveats logging iisen ri setter tice logging out logical computation login logout log WOW E 2 so ces cect ns res A E eeccearetseaates M Sample sea a a a AEE mac address Manual manual Sample ics seccsssccsecvessevessessazcasecesbenesduoveesoodevecsevsees esse Mahal sampled Data wisiccsevecieeveccsscecsencseciwssreseseuvsrecatevenzs manual sampled data file Data format manual sampling remote Control eee eee eens Math sees ctecssceeesteseessecseevedteael suseeetetecs duseseevieemstdctaxheets maximum number of data points per channel App 2 Meas CH Math CH i icctacinivandvavdraniciavieanaweles measurement input assignments M dia FIFO reusiesinen eyan neer A 7 4 Mem ONY vse ccstersct nenten anea areae aa Daa Aai AENEAS 9 12 Memory alarm a memory information memory summary memory TIMEUP misosi 1 37 1 38 7 4 MENU KEY vs neintasti cen eann S 3 1 IMESSAGE COOS krismis seen cvveccacnsneeedhconcveysscccaseshevesect 6 7
145. c setting mode loads all of the setup data of setting mode and basic setting mode To load only the setup data of setting mode load the setup data in setting mode e Ifthe contents of the loaded setup data are invalid refer to the error message log that appears by pressing the FUNC key and soft keys For the procedure of displaying the error message log see section 9 4 7 23 suoneado peo7 anes ewa Chapter 8 Computation and Report Function Related Operations M1 or PM1 Option 8 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags This section explains how to set computing equations to computation channels and how to set tags You cannot set computing equations while data is being acquired to the internal memory or while computation is in progress Computing Equations Constants and Tags lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display e Assigning computation channels and setting equations MENU key switch to setting mode gt 9 soft key select Math set1 Expression Alarm From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Hath on Calculation expression l Span Lower Span Upper Unit 200 00 200 00 Alarm La eS 2 S Next 1 3 e Assigning constants used in equations of computation channels MENU key switch to setting mode gt 10 soft key select Math set2 Constant From the operation mode use the above keys to open th
146. cale is divided into 4 or 5 section the area between the main scale marks is divided further into 10 sections using small and medium marks When the scale is divided into 6 to 12 sections the area between the main scale marks is divided further into 5 sections using small marks However small marks are not displayed for the following cases e When the measurement computation range resolution is smaller than the total number of sections created by small marks e When zone display is used e When partial expanded display is used The scale values are displayed according to the following rules e When the trend is displayed vertically If the number of scale divisions is 4 to 6 values are displayed by all the main scale marks If the number is 7 to 12 values are displayed by every other main scale marks When the trend is displayed horizontally If the number of scale divisions is 4 to 7 values are displayed by all the main scale marks If the number is 8 to 12 values are displayed by every other main scale marks e Scale upper and lower limits are displayed at the ends of the scale e Scale values are displayed up to 3 digits excluding the minus sign However if the integer part of values at the ends of the scale are both 1 digit or the integer part for both is 0 2 digits are displayed Example If the scale is 0 05 to 0 50 the lower limit is 0 0 and the upper limit is 0 5 e If the integer part of either end of the sc
147. cceptable 410 Login successful The special user level 411 Login successful The general user level 420 Connection has been lost 421 The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded 422 Communication has timed out Note For information regarding the communication function of this instrument see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 10 7 Bunooyseaqnol g 10 1 A List of Messages Status Messages Code Message 500 Execution is complete 501 Please wait a moment 503 Data are being saved to media 504 File is being loaded from media 505 Formatting 506 Memory save to media was interrupted 507 Exchange media to continue the saving operation 510 Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 511 MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling or calculating 512 Because memory save is manual mode FTP is not available 520 Connecting to the line 521 The data file is being transferred 551 FTP test is being executed FTP transfer of snapshots can be used Cautions Code Message Ref section 600 Measured data and settings have been initialized 601 Measured data have been initialized 610 This username is already registered Use another user name See section 9 3 611 There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode Set Enter Setup to a user or users See section 9 3
148. ce is displayed on the screen In addition a signal can be output from the relay output terminals A1 A2 or A3 option on the rear panel of this instrument Alarm Type Number of Alarms You can set up to four alarms for each channel Alarm Conditions The following eight conditions are available Letters in the parentheses are the symbols used for each alarm e Upper limit alarm H An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the alarm value e Lower limit alarm L An alarm occurs when the measured value falls below the alarm value Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Measured Alarm occurrence alarm value computed data Alarm release J je Alarm release i alarm value Measured computed data Alarm occurrence e Difference upper limit alarm h An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes greater than or equal to the alarm value e Difference lower limit alarm I An alarm occurs when the difference between the measured values of two channels becomes smaller than or equal to the alarm value 1 Can be specified only on difference computation channels e Upper limit on rate of change alarm R The amount of change of the measured values over a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of increase becomes greater than or equal to the specified value e Lower limit on rate of change alarm r The amount of change of the measured values ov
149. certain interval set using the Decrease entry box of basic alarm settings An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the falling direction is less than or equal to the specified value Delay upper limit alarm T An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or equal to the alarm value for the specified delay Delay lower limit alarm t An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below or equal to the alarm value for the specified delay 1 Can only be specified on difference computation channels 2 Can only be specified on measurement channels Value Set the alarm value for the selected alarm type Rly Select whether relay output is enabled On or disabled Off If On is selected the Number entry box appears No Set the alarm output relay number to output the relay contact signal from the terminal of the option terminal block Selectable relays are 101 and 102 A1 option I01 to 104 A2 option or 101 to I06 A3 option For the correspondence between the output relay numbers and the positions of the terminals of the terminal blocks see pages 2 9 and 2 10 4 10 4 2 Setting Alarm Related Parameters Alarm Delay Time When Type is set to T or t e First CH Last CH Select the measurement channels for setting the alarm delay The target channels also apply to Tag and Moving average or Filter settings e Alarm delay time Set the alarm delay us
150. change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed 7 1 suoneado peo7 anes ewa 7 1 Setting Measured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Data Save to the External Storage Medium Auto save Manual save Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Storage to the External Storage Medium The displayed items vary depending on the saving method you choose Hemory Save Data Event Sample rate Hode Block Data length Pre Trigger Trigger Key External Alarm Hanual uto Hemory Save Data Event Sample rate Hode Block Data length Pre Trigger Trigger Key External Alarm Hanual Auto Display E D Event ls Trigger Display E D Event is Hanual_ Event is Event is ls Acuqires display data and event data Acuqires display data only Acuqires event data only Save Select the mode used to save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium from Auto and Manual Manual When you insert an external storage medium into the drive and carry
151. channels Meas CH 01 to 03 3 ch model 01 to 06 6 ch model 01 to 12 12 ch model Math CH 31 to 42 selectable only on models with the computation function M1 PM1 option Off On Select On to save data from the selected channel or Off to not save data from the channel all channels are On by default Waveforms of channels turned Off cannot be displayed but digital values bar graphs and alarms for those channels can be displayed Memory Timeup When saving the data to the external storage medium in Auto mode set the time for saving the data when specifying the time using date and time Timeup type Select the time when data is to be saved from the following Select Off if you are not using this function Hour Every hour Day Every day at the Time hour on the hour Week Every week on the day specified by Day of the week at the Time hour on the hour Month Every month on the day specified by Date at the Time hour on the hour Date Day of the week Date is a setting used when Timeup type is set to Month Set the value in the range of 1 to 28 29 to 31 cannot be specified Date also appears when Timeup type is set to Hour or Day However the setting is valid only when Timeup type is set to Month Day of the week is a setting used when Timeup type is set to Week Enter the day of the week using the soft key Time hour Set the hour when the data is to be saved when Ti
152. creen image data The screen image displayed on this instrument File name Mddhhmma PNG For information on using each type of data see appendix 4 Types of Data Created on this instrument and Their Uses 1 28 1 5 Data Storage Function File Name Mddhhmm denotes the date and time Mddhhmm of setup data and screen image data is the date and time the file was created Mddhhmm of other data is the date and time the first data was sampled M Month 1 to 9 X October Y November Z December dd day hh hour mm minute a denotes the last digit of the year 0 to 9 However a becomes a sequence number for the following case It takes a value between A and Z For example if the acquisition of the display data is started and stopped and started again within 1 minute by pressing the START key the two file names are the same up to Mddhhmm month day hour and minute In this case the second file is assigned the sequence number A Example 70112563 DDS 7011256A DDS Two display data files which sampling started on July 1st 2003 at 12 56 File Creation The display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data M PM1 option and report data M PM1 option are temporarily written to the internal memory Data files are created when the data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium Note A backup should be made of the data on the external storage medium
153. creens Rate of change pes Increase Decreare Hysteresis aC Procedure Operation Keys 4 Switching the Operation Mode and Setting Menu The display switches each time the MENU key is pressed The ESC key can also be used when switching to the operation mode from the setting menu suo eiado uowwog pue s pon Aejdsig Sued Jo soweyN e 3 2 Basic Key Operations Switching Operation Mode to Basic Setting Menu 1 Press the MENU key to display the setting menu 2 Press the FUNC key for at least 3 seconds Note eeEeeEESeSssse Sse e You cannot switch to basic setting mode while data is being acquired to the internal memory while computation is in progress or while the external storage medium is being accessed Stop the data acquisition to the internal memory and computation before switching to basic setting mode If you change the settings under 3 Memory or 4 Memory and trend Memory timeup excluding memory time up items in basic setting mode save the new settings and return to operation mode the measured data in the internal memory is cleared Save important data to the external storage medium before entering basic setting mode Switching Screens on the Operation Mode You can change the operation screens according to your needs by carrying out the following procedures Procedure Operation Keys START ST
154. cribes the specifications of this instrument Appendix Describes how to estimate the time for acquiring measured data to the internal memory meaning and syntax of computation equations data types the recorder creates the ASCII file format and a list of the setup items Index Note e This user s manual covers information regarding the recorders that have a suffix code for language 2 English e For details on setting the displayed language see section 3 6 vi How to Use This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual Unit Kiis Denotes 1024 Example 768 KB file size Kaciri Denotes 1000 Safety Markings The following markings are used in this manual A CAUTION Note Danger Refer to corresponding location on the instrument This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious injury or death to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument Symbols Used on Pages
155. ctive channels All channels Data acquired Data at the intervals specified by a timer Format Binary Trigger Timeout of the internal timer Max number of data sets internal memory can hold 400 data sets or 16 blocks number of computation start and stop operations 12 7 suoneoyioeds B 12 4 Data Storage Specifications Report Data option Item Specifications Objective channels Specified channels up to 12 channels Report type Hourly daily hourly daily daily weekly or daily monthly Format ASCII Max number of report data internal memory can hold 40 Setup Data Item Specifications Contents Setup data of this instrument Output External storage medium Screen Image Data Item Specifications Data format png format Output External storage medium or communication interface Trigger Key operation communication command option or remote input signals option Data Saving to the External Storage Medium Only for Models with Storage Drive Item Specifications Data Save Saves data in the internal memory to external storage medium Manual saving Data saving using a given key operation when inserting external storage medium Automatic saving Display data Periodic saving at auto save intervals 10 min to 31 days or at specified time to external storage medium Event data Free Periodic saving at data length 3 min to 31 days or at specified time to external storage medium Trigger
156. d 4 4 4 1 Setting Parameters Related to Measurement Inputs When set to Delta difference computation Type Range Selectable Measurement Span Range Volt 20mV 20 00 to 20 00 mV 60mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200mV 200 0 to 200 0 mV 2V 2 000 to 2 000 V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20V 20 00 to 20 00 V 50V 50 00 to 50 00 V TC R 1760 0 to 1760 0 C 3168 to 3168 F S 1760 0 to 1760 0 C 3168 to 3168 F B 1820 0 to 1820 0 C 3276 to 3276 F K 1570 0 to 1570 0 C 2826 to 2826 F E 1000 0 to 1000 0 C 1800 to 1800 F J 1300 0 to 1300 0 C 2340 0 to 2340 0 F T 600 0 to 600 0 C 1080 0 to 1080 0 F N 1300 0 to 1300 0 C 2340 to 2340 F Ww 2315 0 to 2315 0 C 4167 to 4167 F L 1100 0 to 1100 0 C 1980 to 1980 F U 600 0 to 600 0 C 1080 0 to 1080 0 F WRe 2400 0 to 2400 0 C 4320 to 4320 F RTD PT Pt100 800 0 to 800 0 C 1440 0 to 1440 0 F JPT JPt100 750 0 to 750 0 C 1350 0 to 1350 0 F JPT1K Pt1000 800 0 to 800 0 C 1440 0 to 1440 0 F DI Level 1to1 Cont 1to1 N3 option Note Relationship with the reference channel Even if the input types Volt TC RTD or DI or the measurement ranges between the difference computation channel and reference channel are not the same the difference computation is performed according to the following rules e If the number of digits to the right of the decimal is different between the reference channel and the difference co
157. d gt On Off On Off On Memory timeup gt Timeup type Off Hour Day Week or Month Off Memory timeup gt Date 1 to 28 1 Memory timeup gt Time hour 0 to 23 0 1 M1 or PM1 option 5 Aux Time zone Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value AUX gt Tag Channel Tag or Channel Channel AUX gt Memory alarm AUX gt Language AUX gt Partial Time zone gt Difference from GMT Media FIFO Off 1h 2h 5h 10h 20 h 50h or 100 h English Japanese German French or Chinese Spanish or Italian Use Not 1200 to 1200 On Off 1 h Off on models with no drive English Not 0 Off only for models with a CF memory card slot 6 Keylock Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Keylock gt Use Not Use Not Not Keylock gt Password Up to 6 alphanumeric characters Keylock gt Keys such as START Free or Lock Free Keylock gt ALARM ACK Free or Lock Free Keylock gt Math Free or Lock Free Keylock gt Write memory Free or Lock Free Keylock gt Media Free or Lock Free 7 Key login Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value App Key login gt Use Not Use Not Not Key login gt Auto logout On Off Off z Key login gt UserID Use Not Use Not Not pe Key login gt Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 or 7 1 2 Key login gt On Off On Off On x Key login gt User name Up to 16 alphanumeric characters user Key login gt User ID Up to 4 alphanumeric characters 1 Key login gt Pass
158. d option Write memory soft keys below e Message soft key Disabled Manual sample soft key Disabled Trigger soft key Disabled Save Display soft key Disabled Save Event soft key Disabled e E Mail START soft key Disabled e E Mail STOP soft key Disabled e E Mail test soft key Disabled Media Saving data to the external storage medium is prohibited during manual save mode Note To prohibit further setting operations lock the MENU key 1 55 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 9 Other Functions Key Login Logout Log Display System Screen This function allows only certain users to access this instrument The users are distinguished by their name user IDs and passwords Up to 7 users can be registered A list of phenomena that occurred can be displayed in the order of occurrence for the following items Error messages 50 most recent messages Alog of key login and logout 50 most recent logins Alogofcommunication commands 200 most recent commands Alog of file transfers using the FTP client function 50 most recent transfers Alog of e mail transmissions the 50 most recent transmissions Alog of Web operations the 50 most recent operations Error Log Example Displays the date and time of the error occurrence error code number and the message The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs ERROR LOG 5 FE ee em
159. d at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot on the time axis on the screen Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and are useful for long term observations See page 1 18 for the display update rate e Event Data Event data is the measured computed data at specified sampling intervals The sampling interval can be selected from the selections below You cannot specify a sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval 3 ch model 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5s 10 s 30s 60s 120s 300s and 600 s 6 ch and 12 ch model 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 30s 60s 120s 300s and 600s By setting the sampling interval equal to the scan interval all measured or computed data sampled at the scan interval can be saved In addition the event data generated when an event occurs an alarm for example can also be saved This is useful when you wish to observe the measured computed data in detail 1 30 1 5 Data Storage Function Specifying the Data to Be Acquired Specify the type of data to be acquired depending on the application Several examples are shown below Please use them as references Example 1 Continuously record the waveform data as in the conventional chart type recorders Select display data only Example 2 Continuously record the waveform data and when an alarm occurs record detailed data around the alarm incident Select display data and event data Fo
160. d corresponding to one division referred to as the display update rate The relationship between the display update rate and the sampling interval of displayed data is as follows Display Update 15 s 30s 1 min 2 min 5 min10 min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h Rate div Speed of movement 2500 1250 625 312 156 78 42 31 21 10 5 2 2 6 1 0 of waveform approximate value mm h for the the 3 ch model only Updating the Numerical Display Numerical display is updated every second However when the scan interval on the 6 ch and 12 ch model is 2 s the update rate is also 2 s Note The data displayed on the screen are a maximum and minimum values of the data that are sampled at the scan interval within the time period corresponding to one dot Displayed data of the waveform when the display update rate is set to one minute 2 s 1 dot 1 division 30 dots Maximum value 1 min Minimum value When the display update rate is set to one minute the time period corresponding to one dot the sampling interval of displayed data is 2 s Writing Messages Messages specified by the user can be displayed at arbitrary points in time For example by displaying a message when a certain operation is carried out the point at which the operation is carried out can be seen visually Displayed messages are saved Number of Messages 8 Messages Trend Screen START
161. d one monthly report or 38 daily reports and two monthly reports Note The number of report data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary See section 1 4 1 36 1 5 Data Storage Function Saving Data to the External Storage Medium for Models with External Storage Drive Type of Storage Medium The measured computed data in the internal memory can be saved to the following external storage media Floppy disk 1 44 MB e CF memory card 32 MB to 512 MB Note e Use an external storage medium formatted to FDISK 1 partition hard disk format e Ifa memory card larger than 32 MB is formatted using Windows XP FAT32 is selected by default This instrument cannot use memory cards formatted to FAT32 When formatting a memory card on Windows XP select FAT for the file system Two Saving Methods There are two methods in which the data are saved to the external storage medium manual save and auto save Manual Save When saving the data residing in the internal memory to the external storage medium insert the storage medium into the drive and carry out a given key operation You can specify whether to save the entire data in the memory or only the data that have not been saved to the storage medium beforehand Be sure to save data to a storage medium before it is overwritten Check the remaining space in the internal memory and save data Auto Save The external storage medium is placed in the driv
162. data is set to be acquired See section 7 6 165 Snapshot FTP transmission is not effective Basic setting mode 10 Communication gt 3 FTP transfer file Operation Errors e Errors related to external storage medium Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 200 Operation aborted because an error was found on media Check the storage medium 201 Not enough free space on media Use another storage medium 202 Media is read only Release the write protection 210 Media has not been inserted Insert a storage medium into the drive 211 Media is damaged or not formatted Use another storage medium or carry out formatting 212 Format error Try formatting again or use another storage medium 213 The file is read only Access to other files or make the file write enable 214 There is no file or directory Check files and directories on the storage medium 215 Exceeded the allowable number of files Delete files or change storage medium 216 The file or directory name is incorrect AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK and strings containing spaces are not allowable 10 2 10 1 A List of Messages Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 217 Unknown file type Access to other files See appendix 4 218 Directory exists Delete the directory or change directory name Confirm the directory name See section 7 7 219 Invalid file or directory operation
163. day 5day 5day 5day 5day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 7day 10 day 10day 10day 10day 10day 10 day 14day 14day 14day 14day 14 day 31 day 31 day 31 day 31 day for the 3 ch model only e Pre trigger Select the range when saving the data existing before the trigger condition is met as event data Select the range as a percentage of the data length from 5 25 50 75 95 and 100 If you do not wish to acquire the data existing before the trigger condition is met select 0 e Trigger Set the trigger condition used to acquire the event data e Key Select On if you wish to apply the trigger using key operation e External Select On if you are applying the trigger signal through remote input e Alarm Select On if you wish to use alarm occurrences as triggers Note e If Alarm is set to ON a trigger activates if even just one alarm occurs e Ifthe START key is pressed while an alarm is occurring a trigger activates e Key External and Alarm are in an OR relationship If any of the conditions set to ON become true a trigger activates 7 3 suoljeiedo peoanes erd 7 1 Setting Measured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Data Save to the External Storage Medium Memory and Trend Channels for Saving Data Meas CH Math CH Select the type of target channels from Meas CH and Math CH First CH Last CH Set the range of channels to turn On Off depending on the type of target
164. e Increase 1 Decrease 1 Hysteresis On rs RE Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed 4 7 suoie1 do dnjyes wey pue yndu juowsinseoyy gt 4 2 Setting Alarm Related Parameters Alarm Output Relay Action Action of Alarm Indication etc Reflash Set whether to enable On or disable Off initial value the reflash alarm function of the alarm relay output The reflash alarm function is set to output relays 101 102 and 103 only Relay e AND Select the relays that are to operate using AND logic Set the range of relays from the first alarm relay to take the AND logic All subsequent relays will be set to OR logic Available selections are None 101 1
165. e computation Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 and the measured value of the reference channel is 100 0 the computation result becomes 10 00 100 0 90 00 e When the units for the reference channel and the difference computation channel are different the measured value is not adjusted Example When the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 V and the measured value of the reference channel is 5 00 mV the computation result becomes 10 00 V 5 00 mV 5 00 V e When the reference channel is set to Scale or Sart the computation uses the scaled values Scaling The input value is converted to a value in the appropriate unit and the converted value becomes a measured value of the channel Input value Measured value 5V 300 0 C 1V 100 0 C Square Root When the input type is set to DC voltage the square root of the input value is computed The computed result is scaled to a value in the appropriate unit and the scaled value becomes a measured value of the channel Square root computation Note e The this instrument uses the following square root computation Fearan Fan VA y Fii V max Vmin e Vmin Lower limit of span Fmin Lower limit of scale Vx Input voltage e Vmax Upper limit of span Fmax Upper limit of scale Fx Scaling value e When the value inside the square root is negative the measured value is indicated as
166. e including Modbus protocol 2 Ethernet 10BASE T interface Fail memory end detection and output Mathematical function report fuction included Three terminal isolated RTD input for measurement Pt1000 Q RTD input 24 VDC AC power supply Pulse measurement input 3 points Remote control 5 points 4 Remote control 8 points 1 Only one can be specified at once 2 Either one can be specified 3 If F1 is specified A3 cannot be specified 4 If PM1 is specified A3 M1 or R1 cannot be specified If PM1 is specified A2 F1 cannot be specified NO Instrument Number When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please give them the instrument number Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The standard accessories below are supplied with the instrument Check that all contents are present and that they are undamaged F No Name Part Number Model Q ty Note 1 Terminal screws 3 M4 2 Mounting bracket E 2 For panel mounting 3 Recorder Standard 1 CD ROM used to install software for Software setting the recorder and displaying data 4 Paperless Recorder 9499 040 75411CD 1 CD ROM containing the PDF files of this electronic manual manual Paperless Recorder Communication Interface User s Manual Recorder Standard Software User s Manual and other files 5 Paperless Recorder 9499 040 75
167. e Screen Image Data Save destination e Data is saved to the external storage medium for models with that type of medium installed e Data is sent via FTP for models with the Ethernet communication interface C7 option that are set up for snapshot FTP transfer For the description of Ethernet communication interface see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 File format data size The file is in PNG format The data size of the screen image is approximately 12 KB screen File name The file name month day hour minute when the save operation of the screen image data was executed sequence number png is automatically assigned to the screen image data files Mddhhmma PNG M Month 1 9 X October Y November Z December dd day hh hour mm minute a the lowest digit of the year 0 to 9 except if the screen image data is saved multiple times within a minute in which case A to Z are assigned in order from the second file 7 15 suoljeiedo peoanes erd 7 6 Loading the Measured Data on the External Storage Medium Historical Trend This section explains how to load the display data or event data that is stored on the external storage medium and display the trend on the historical trend screen For the operations on the historical trend screen see section 5 4 Measured Data on the External Storage Medium Historical Trend lt Setting Mode gt Procedure
168. e When the acquisition mode is Free and auto save is specified The box indicates a event data file The green bar shows the progress of the data acquisition Time display shows the remaining time a event data file is created For the description of event data and auto save see section 1 5 Data Storage Function 7 Icon indicating the external storage medium status No icon is displayed A storage medium is not inserted in the drive or this instrument is not equipped with a storage medium drive Note If you use a floppy disk press FUNC key gt Media soft key to have the disk in the drive detected D and E are displayed alternately The storage medium is being accessed E External storage medium waiting not being accessed F The green level inside the icon indicates the amount of used space of the storage medium If the remaining amount falls to 10 or less the color changes to red However the color does not change when the FIFO action of the CF memory card is specified For the FIFO action of the CF memory card see section 1 5 Data Storage Function 8 Computation icon only on models with the computation option No computation icon is displayed No computation option M1 PM1 or computation is stopped White computation icon Computation in progress Yellow computation icon Computation dropout occurred Note Computation dropout occurs when the computation process cannot be co
169. e arrow key the waveform scrolls by two divisions Specifying the Displayed Position Using the Cursor Enclosed in parentheses are for the horizontal trend display 1 Press the right up arrow key to display the all data display in the right upper section of the screen 5 4 Displaying Measured Data Previously Acquired Historical Trend Explanation Display reference position Cursor Time at the cursor position PI 206 193 78 188 70 188 65 181 48kPa 2 Move the cursor to select the displayed position using the up and down left and right arrow keys 3 Pressing the left down arrow key switches to the historical trend screen with shifted waveforms The cursor position on the all data display locates the display reference position Displaying the Current Trend Data and the Historical Trend Data This operation can be carried out while the display data is displayed on the historical trend screen Enclosed in parentheses are for the horizontal trend display Pressing the left down arrow key displays the current display data on the upper right half of the screen and the historical trend on the lower left half of the screen To return to the previous screen press the right up arrow key Display Reference Position The most recent data is located at the reference display position Expanding Reducing the Time Axis The time axis can be expanded or reduced with respect to the display reference position
170. e at all times Data saving to the external storage medium is done automatically e Display data The display data in the internal memory is saved automatically to the external storage medium according to the timing shown below e Atspecified intervals You ca select an interval auto save interval form 10 minutes to 31 days The selections vary depending on the number of channels of data that is saved and the sampling interval Specified time You can specify a time to save the data as follows This operation is called data saving through memory timeup Every hour on the hour e Specified hour on the hour every day Specified hour on the hour on the specified day every week Specified hour on the hour on the specified day every month e When the acquisition to the memory is stopped When agiven key operation is carried out to save data see page 1 39 You can save data using a key operation when necessary 1 37 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 5 Data Storage Function Examples of Data Save Operation to the External Storage Medium During Auto Save Example 1 Auto save interval or data length 1 day Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium Not used After starting at 13 10 data is saved every 24 hours after at 13 10 everyday 7 19 13 10 7 20 13 10 7 21 13 10 7 22 13 10 gt Start Saved to the iena acted medium Example 2 Auto save interval or data length 1 day Da
171. e control 0 0 0 eee eres 1 53 Index 5 Subject to alterations without notice Bei Anderungen erfolgt keine Mitteilung Modifications sans avertissement r serv es PMA Proze und Maschinen Automation GmbH Postfach 310 229 D 34058 Kassel Printed in Germany 9499 040 77311 0412 A4
172. e file reaches 25 e For daily reports e When the report for the first day of the month is created every month e When the number of data sets in the file reaches 32 Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive FIFO first in first out method for the CF memory card FIFO refers to a processing method in which the oldest files are deleted to make room for new files when the external storage medium becomes full FIFO can be specified only if the external storage medium is a compact flash memory card CF memory card and autos save mode is selected The default is OFF Time mS JEDETE m CF memory card The oldest file is overwritten by the newest file 1 40 1 5 Data Storage Function e FIFO can be specified for files in the specified directory FIFO cannot be specified for read only system or hidden files Inthe following cases the oldest files are deleted e When the amount of free space on the CF card after saving a data file falls below 1 MB e When the number of files in the directory is 1000 or more Note The dates and times of manual sample files and report files are updated whenever new data is added meaning that they are less likely to be eligible for deletion To release this condition only when the FIFO
173. e following setting display GROUP 1 Oct 05 2003 89 53 ogo MELS Constant Number Kat Value 1 e Setting tags of computation channels MENU key switch to setting mode gt 11 soft key select Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display First CH Tee TLOG Timer No a Sum scale off Rolling average Alarm delay time 10 s Input Clear Copy uondo LINd 10 LIN suoneiado pay uonouny Yodsey pue uoneyndwog eo 8 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags Setup Procedure e Assigning computation channels 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the First CH and Last CH boxes 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the start and end channel numbers for setting the computation channels 3 With the cursor blue at the Math box press the On soft key The Calculation expression Span Lower Span Upper and Unit boxes appear e Calculation expression 1 With the cursor blue at the Calculation expression box press the Input soft key The following expression pop up window appears Cursor blue Select the input position using the left and right arrow keys Number input keypad Computing element input keypad Select the input number using Select the input character using the up and down arrow keys the up and down arrow keys
174. e ground wire Crimp on lug with isolation sleeve Power supply wires 3 Close the cover transparent for the power supply wires and secure it in place with screws 2 13 Bundi pue uoneyyjeisu m Chapter 3 Names of Parts Display Modes and Common Operations 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions Front Panel Operation Key Operation key panel tab LCD screen Displays various operation screens such as the trend display and the setup screen to configure this instrument Operation key panel Operation keys are arranged Open the panel by pushing down on the tab located at the center of the top edge of the cover and pulling it forward when inserting or removing the external storage medium such as floppy disks and CF memory cards DISP ENTER key and four Arrow keys The keys are used to switch the operation screen in the operation mode In the setup screens the keys are used to select parameters and to confirm the new settings START key Used to start the data acquisition to the internal memory and display the waveform on the trend screen STOP key Used to stop the data acquisition to the internal memory It also stops the updating of the waveform on the trend screen USER key Executes the action assigned to this key FUNC key If the key is pressed in operation mode a soft key menu is display
175. e item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box s u uo peAe dsiq ay BuiBueyy 10 suoeiado al 6 8 Setting the Scale Scale Division Scale Position of Trend Screens e First CH Last CH Set the target channel common with the Zone setting e Graph e Division Set the number of main scale marks from 4 to 12 In addition to the values of 4 to 12 C10 is available When C10 is selected the scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks and scale values are indicated at 0 30 50 70 and 100 positions on the trend display Note ___ Only main marks are displayed on bar graph screens e Scale position Select the scale display position on the trend display from 1 to 6 When the trend waveform is displayed vertically the top is 1 and the bottom is 6 When the trend waveform is displayed horizontally the right end is 1 and the left end is 6 Select Off if you do not wish to display the scale Below is an example in which the position of the scale is offset for each channel with a scale of different division setting e When displaying the trend waveform vertically 2 0 1 4 8 8 1 0 2 a 4 scale division sample Scal
176. e items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box 6 10 Changing the Display of Bar Graphs Bar Graph Base Position e First CH Last CH Set the target channel common with the Zone setting e Graph e Bar graph Set the base position of the bar graph when set to horizontal display to Normal or Center When the bar graph is displayed vertically the base position is fixed to Normal the bottom of the bar graph is the base position GROUP 1 Jot 85 2083 83 88 2 100 0 Bar graph base position Center Bar graph base position Normal Display Direction of the Bar Graphs e Direction e Bar graph Select the display direction of bar graphs from Horizontal or Vertical 6 19 s u juo peAejdsig ay Huibueys 10 suoneado al 6 11 Switching the Displayed Groups Automatically at a Specified Time Interval Scroll Time This section explains how to set the automatic switching interval of the displayed groups Automatic Switching Interval of the Displayed Groups Scroll Time lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 4 soft key select View Direction LCD From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display pst os 2003 09 40 49 MEO V
177. e left arrow key Press the DISP ENTER key A dialog box for confirming the deletion appears Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the operation select No using the right arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key e Formatting the external storage medium Ws Enter the volume name in the Volume name box The following character strings cannot be used in the volume name AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK and strings containing spaces If you are not going to set the volume name move the cursor to the Type box using the down arrow key Select Quick or Normal using the soft keys Press the DISP ENTER key A format confirmation window appears Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the operation select No using the right arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key Formatting the External Storage Medium e Type Select from the following Quick Performs only a logical format Normal Performs a physical format and a logical format Disk Format Floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB CF memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format Format Time Type of storage media Quick Normal Note Floppy disk Approx 6 s Approx 1 min 30 s CF memory card Approx 3 s Approx 1 min 30 s 32 MB Approx 5 s Approx 6 min 160 MB 7 18 7 7 Managing Files and Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium Deleting Files and Directories Formatting the Medium lt Basic Setting Mode gt Procedure
178. e measurement span See section 6 12 31 Partial expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel Check communication command parameters Confirm the mode setting See section 4 1 35 The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal upper limit gt lower limit See section 6 7 36 The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper limit upper limit gt lower limit See section 6 7 37 The display band is narrower than 4 of the entire display upper limit lower limit gt 5 See section 6 7 40 Incorrect group set character string Example 01 03 05 08 See section 6 1 41 There is no specified input channel Check communication command parameters 3 ch model 1 to 3 6 ch model 1 to 6 12 ch model 1 to 12 42 Exceeded the number of channels which can be set Check communication command parameters 3 ch model 1 to 3 6 ch model 1 to 6 12 ch model 1 to 12 43 A channel number cannot repeat in a group A channel cannot be assigned twice or more to a group See section 6 1 45 There is no character string saved in the clipboard Copy a character string to the clipboard 46 The character string saved in the clipboard is too long Paste a character string with the proper number of characters 61 There is no channel specified by the MATH expression 3 ch model 1 to 3 6 ch model 1 to 6 12 ch model 1 to 12 Computation channels 31 to 42 62 MATH expression grammar is incorrect Check the expression S
179. e position 1 g z 5 scale division sample 6 scale division sample 7 scale division sample 8 scale division sample 9 scale division sample Scale position 6 2 0 1 2 g 0 4 U oA 1 2 2a 10 scale division sample 2 5 7 za 11 scale division sample E 2 a 12 scale division sample 2O Josipa PP 8 11 24 C10 scale division sample e When displaying the trend waveform horizontally a mT STMT PST MAT Epee p x H A r LAE LALAH TU Scale position 1 Scale position 6 6 14 6 8 Setting the Scale Note If the scales of multiple channels are set to the same position the scale of the channel assigned earlier to the group is displayed Example If the order of assignment of a group is 03 02 01 and the scale display position of all channels is set to 1 the scale of channel 3 is displayed at display position 1 Even if some of the scale display positions are skipped the scale is packed towards display position 1 Example Suppose the assignment of channels to a group is 01 02 03 and the display positions of the scales are set to 1 3 and 6 respectively The scales are actually displayed at positions 1 2 and 3 respectively The scale marks are displayed according to the following rules The scale can be divided into 4 to 12 sections using the main scale marks When the s
180. e section 7 8 forthe operating procedure to clear the internal memory 1 51 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 8 Remote Control Function R1 PM1 Option When a contact or open collector signal is applied to the remote control terminal a predetermined action is carried out Arbitrary actions can be assigned to the eight remote control terminals Recorder Contact J lt or gt Open collector Actions That Can Be Assigned Enclosed in parentheses are soft key expressions e None None No action is assigned e Starts stops data acquisition Memory Remote input Edge Rising start falling stop Starts stops writing display data and or event data to the internal memory and the report function M1 PM1 option While data acquisition is in progress applying a rising signal produces no effect While data acquisition is suspended applying a falling signal produces no effect e External trigger for event data acquisition Trigger Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more This becomes the external trigger that starts the acquisition of the event data to the internal memory This is valid only when acquiring the event data to the internal memory using the trigger or rotate mode the acquisition start trigger is setto external trigger and this instrumentis in the trigger wait state For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect e Releasing the alarm indication and output relay AlarmACK Remote i
181. ease alarm ACK operation is performed Rate of change e Increase Select the sampling data count used to determine the interval for the high limit on rate of change alarm from 1 to 15 The interval is calculated as the scan interval multiplied by the sampling data count e Decrease Select the sampling data count used to determine the interval for the low limit on rate of change alarm from 1 to 15 The interval is calculated as the scan interval multiplied by the sampling data count Hysteresis Turn On initial value Off the alarm hysteresis If set to On the hysteresis is set to 0 5 of the measurement span or scale span 4 2 Setting Alarm Related Parameters Alarm Output Alarm Type Alarm Delay Time lt Setting Mode gt Set the alarm output after setting the range All alarm settings of a channel are cancelled in the following cases When the input type Volt TC etc is changed When the input range is changed When the upper or lower limit of the span or scale is changed on channels that are set to scale or square root computation including changes in the decimal point position When Range is set to Skip alarm output cannot be specified the alarm entry box is grayed For a description on the alarm setting of computation channels see section 8 3 Opening the Setting Display e Setting the alarm output and alarm type MENU key switch to setting mode gt 1 soft key select Range Alarm Fro
182. ease alarm indication and relay output when alarm display and alarm output relay action is set to hold Math Starts stops computation when the computation function M1 PM1 is equipped Math rst Clears computed results when the computation function M1 PM1 is equipped and the computation is suspended M sample Stores instantaneous values of all channels to the internal memory Message 1 to Message 8 Snapshot Media Displays messages and stores them to the internal memory Saves an image of the displayed screen to the storage medium This setting is only available for models with external storage medium drives However this function can be performed even on models with no drives by using the Ethernet communication interface C7 option that are set up for snapshot FTP transfer Detects the external storage medium in the drive Key lock is a function that locks key operations and the saving of data to the external storage medium during manual save mode A password needs to be entered to release the key lock Items and Behaviors of the Key Lock Can be set individually Item Behavior during Key Lock START key Disabled STOP key Disabled MENU key Disabled USER key Disabled DISP ENTER key Switching operation screens is disabled Alarm ACK soft key Disabled Math soft keys below e Math START soft key Disabled option e Math STOP soft key Disabled option e Math reset soft key Disable
183. ection and that it responds within the proper time period TAC Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period ECHO Failed to transmit data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period REPLY Failed to receive data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period SERVER The server is not in a condition to provide the service Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided 10 4 10 1 A List of Messages Code Message 283 FTP command was not accepted Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283 Character String and Details USER Failed user name verification Check the user name setting PASS Failed password verification Check the password setting ACCT Failed account verification Check the account setting TYPE Failed to change the transfer type Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode CWD Failed to change the directory Check the initial path setting PORT Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the security function is disabled PASV Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the server supports PASV commands SCAN Failed
184. ection explains how to set data acquisition of measured data display data and event data to the internal memory as well as how to set the storage of data to the external storage medium Measured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory Data Save to the External Storage Medium lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 3 soft key select Memory 4 soft key select Memory and trend Memory timeup and 5 soft key select Aux Time zone From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Hemory Hemory and trend Save Auto Heas CH ath CH Data E D Event First CH 61 Last CH far Sample rate is Hode Trigger On OFF on Block 1 Data length th Memory timeup Pre Trigger 4 8 Timeup type Month Trigger Key on Date 1 External off Time hour ea Alarm off AUX Tag Channel Channel Hemory alarm lh Language English Partial Not Time zone Difference from GMT 6 Hedia FIFO off On Off Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to
185. ed at the bottom section of the display enabling the execution of various functions The key is also used when switching from setting mode to operation mode ESC key Used to cancel an operation Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode or return to the menu screen from setting screens MENU key Used to enter the setting mode Also used to return to the operation mode from the setting mode 10 Soft keys When a soft key menu is displayed at the bottom section of the display in operation mode setting mode or basic setting mode these soft keys are used to carry out operations or to change the setup information The information above explains the basic functions of each key For a description on how to operate the keys see section 3 2 Basic Key Operations 3 1 suo eiado UOWWOD pue s pon Aejdsig Sued Jo soweN eo 3 1 Names of Parts and Functions Floppy Disk Drive Compact Flash Card Slot The floppy disk drive or compact flash memory card slot is visible when you open the key panel However no drive or slot is present on models with no external storage medium specified R D 3 1 2 1 Floppy Disk Drive Compact Flash Memory Card Slot Depending on the specification you made at the time of purchase either a floppy disk drive or an CF memory card slot is installed 2 Eject button Used whe
186. ed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Timer Number and Sum Scale of the TLOG Computation First CH Last CH You can assign channels numbers 31 to 42 as computation channels Set a range of channel numbers within this range for setting the timer number and sum scale of the TLOG computation The target channels also apply to Tag Rolling average and Alarm delay time settings TLOG Timer No Select the timer number from 1 2 and 3 If you do not use timer select the timer number whose Mode is Off Sum scale Select the sum scale for calculating the sum TLOG SUM from Off s min and h The initial value is Off simply compute the sum You only have to set the channels that are set to sum computation TLOG SUM Off measured computed data every scan interval s X measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval min measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 60 h X measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 3600 8 11 uondo LINd 10 LIN suoneiado pay uonouny Yodsey pue uoNeyndwoy eo 8 5 Setting the Rolling Average This section explains how to set the computed value to the moving ave
187. ee appendix 2 63 MATH expression sequence is incorrect Check the expression See appendix 2 64 MATH upper and lower span values are equal Cannot be the same value See section 8 1 70 MATH constant description is incorrect Maximum number of significant digit is 5 See section 8 1 71 The range of the MATH constant is exceeded 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 See section 8 1 81 All space or quit string cannot be specified Use other string as a user name See section 9 3 85 The login password is incorrect Enter a correct password See section 9 3 Bunooyseqnol g 10 1 A List of Messages Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 86 The key lock release password is incorrect Enter a correct password See section 9 2 87 This key is locked Release the key lock See section 9 2 88 This function is locked Release the key lock See section 9 2 89 Press FUNC key to login Log in first See section 9 3 90 No permission to enter to the SETUP mode Log in as a user who is allowed to enter basic setting mode See section 9 3 91 Password is incorrect Enter a correct password 92 Press ESC key to change to the operation mode Press the ESC key 93 String including space or all space cannot be specified Spaces are not allowed in the Web user name and password 94 More than one address cannot be specified Multiple addresses cannot be
188. effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest dealer as listed on the back cover of this manual Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of us is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by us based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of the University of California Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated CompactFlash and CF are trademarks of SanDisk Corporation in the USA For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 1st Edition February 2004 2nd Edition April 2004 Safety Precautions This instrument conforms to IEC safety class provided with terminal for protective grounding Installation Category Il and EN61326 1 EMC standard class A use in a commercial industrial or business environment This product is a measurem
189. ement period shown here applies when this instrument is used under standard operating conditions For the actual replacement period consider the actual conditions of use Replacements will be carried out by an engineer certified by us When replacement is required contact your nearest dealer Item Replacement Name Specifications Quantity Used Period LCD 5 years Backlight module 1 Battery 10 years Lithium battery 1 Rubber strip 5 years Dust and water proof For front paneland 1 each rubber strip operation key panel Floppy disk drive 5 years 1 PWB assembly 5 years Power supply ASSY 1 5 years AD ASSY Depends on the specifications made at the time of purchase The aluminum electrolytic capacitor is the expendable part Note The replacement period of the LCD is the half life of the brightness The deterioration of brightness varies depending on the condition of use and its determination is subjective Consider these facts for determining the actual replacement period Chapter 12 Specifications 12 1 Input Specifications Item Specifications Number of inputs 3 channels 6 channels 12 channels Scan interval 3 ch model 250 ms 6 ch model 1 s or 2 s 2 s when an A D integration time is set to 100 ms 12 ch model 1 s or 2 s 2 s when an A D integration time is set to 100 ms Inputs Volt DC voltage TC thermocouple RTD resistance temperature detector
190. emory using the left and right arrow keys 3 Press the DISP ENTER key When data acquisition to the internal memory stops the internal memory icon changes from run indication to stop indication Note ____ e If you clear the data in the internal memory see section 7 8 report data is cleared along with other data such as display data e If you stop the report function the report file on the external storage medium is closed If you start the report function again the data is saved to a new file 8 16 Chapter 9 Operations of Other Functions 9 1 Assigning an Action to the USER Key and Using the USER Key This section explains how to assign an action to the USER key and how to use the USER key after the action has been assigned USER Key lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 3 soft key select Trend Save interval User key From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display GROUP 1 3 5 Oct 05 2003 09 56 16 APIF Time div Imin Auto save interval 1h User key Action AlarmACck None Trigger AlarmACK Math Next 1 4 Setting a Action to the USER Key 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Action box under User key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the action you wish to select 3 Press the DISP ENTER key The action you entered is
191. en the computation channels are turned On or turned Off e When the unit is changed Four lines from the bottom of the file example shows the output when the unit for channel 31 is changed from mV to V App 15 xipueddy 3 Appendix 5 Data Formats of ASCII Files Data Format of the Report File e The hourly daily weekly and monthly reports are output in ASCII format using values and strings that are separated by commas e The channel tag unit average value maximum value minimum value and sum value are not output for channels in which the input range is set to Skip or for which the computation is turned OFF The report data are appended to the file at each time interval Syntax TTT T REPORT START TIME YYYY MO DD HH MICRLF Model Serial No IIIIIIIIIIIIIIII CRLF File Header HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH CRLF CH TAG ccccccccccceccce cccccccccccceccc cceccccccccecccccc CRLF UNIT uuuuuu uuuuuu uuuuuu CRLF CRLF yyyy mo dd hh mi eeeeeeee eeeeeeee eeeeeeeeCRLF AVE nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF MAX nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn N0NNANNANNNNNNNNCRLF MIN nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF SUM nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnn nnnnnnnnnnnnnCRLF TTT T Title HOURLY DAYLY WEEKLY or MONTHLY YYYY MO DD Date the report started HH MI Time the report started III I Serial number of this instrument
192. energized When ina mode in which data starts being written to the internal memory upon an event such as an activation of an alarm Trigger or Rotate mode the relay is not energized and memory end is not output The area of data saved on the external storage medium is considered to be available space e Torelease this condition save unsaved data to the storage medium For the operating procedure see section 7 3 e For auto save only The relay becomes energized when the remaining space on the external medium falls to 10 or less In this case the external storage medium icon in the status display section turns from green to red However this does not occur if FIFO is specified for the CF memory card When the FIFO method is specified for the compact flash memory card the relay is energized if a storage medium error is detected e Torelease this condition replace the storage medium See section 1 5 Data Storage Function for information on auto save and manual save modes e Relay operation NO c NC NO c NC NO c NC Normal Memory end Power off NO normally opened C common NC normally closed For Models with No External Storage Drive When the memory alarm time is set to something other than OFF the default setting the relay operates in the same manner as described in For Both Manual Save and Auto Save under For models with an external storage drive Also to deenergize the relay clear the internal memory Se
193. ent category II CAT II instrument Measurement category II CAT II Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation If this instrument is used in a manner not specified in this manual the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired We assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Please use this instrument as a measurement category II CAT II instrument This instrument is for indoor use only About This Manual This manual should be read by the end user Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation This manual explains the functions of the product We does not guarantee that the product will suit a particular purpose of the user Under absolutely no circumstances may the contents of this manual be transcribed or copied in part or in whole without permission The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors or omissions please contact your nearest dealer Precautions Related to the Protection Safety and Alteration of the Product The following safety s
194. equations Example 01 1 KO1 K1 C01 C1 D01 D1 The data value for the channel used in the equation and for all channels greater in number than that channel are substituted with data from the previous scan Do not use more than 16 stacks channel K01 to K30 C01 to C12 D01 to D08 in one equation Otherwise a computation error may occur Example The number of stacks in the equation 01 K01x 03 04xK0O2 is five Order of Precedence of the Operators The order of precedence of the operators in the equation is as follows The operators are placed in order from the highest precedence Type Operator higher precedence Functions ABS SQR LOG EXP TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG P P TLOG SUM TLOG AVE Power XxX Logical negation NOT Multiplication and division x Addition and subtraction Greater than less than GTa ILT GE LE Equal not equal EQ NE Logical AND AND Logical OR exclusive OR OR XOR lower precedence App 6 Appendix 2 Meaning and Syntax of Equations Four arithmetical computations The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 EXAMPLE Addition 01 02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 plus the measured value of channel 2 Subtraction 01 02 Computes the measured value of channel 1 minus the
195. er For a description on the LCD brightness setting see section 3 4 Setting the Brightness of the LCD and the Backlight Saver Function Do not install this instrument in the following places Outdoors In direct sunlight or near heat appliances Select a location with the smallest temperature fluctuation as possible near room temperature 23 C Placing this instrument in direct sunlight or near heat appliances can cause adverse effects Where an excessive amount of soot steam dust or corrosive gases are present Soot steam humidity dust and corrosive gas can cause adverse effects on this instrument Avoid installing this instrument in an environment with a high level of such elements Near magnetic field sources Avoid bringing magnets or instruments that produce magnetic fields near this instrument Using this instrument near a strong magnetic field source can cause measurement errors Where the view of the display is poor This instrument uses a LCD for the display Therefore viewing of the display from an extreme angle is difficult Install this instrument so that the user can easily view the display 2 2 2 2 Installation Installation Procedure Use a 2 mm to 26 mm thick steel plate for the panel on which this instrument is to be mounted 1 Insert this instrument from the front of the panel 2 Using the mounting brackets that came with the package secure this instrument to the panel as shown in the follow
196. er a certain time interval is checked An alarm occurs when the amount of decrease becomes greater than or equal to the specified value 2 Can be specified only on measurement channels Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm R alarm i J f 7 Measured Measured value T2 value Variation Variation IT2 T41 IT2 T11 Te T i N N ralarm ti t2 Time gt ti te Time gt Interval te ti Interval t2 t1 The interval is defined by the following equation and is set in terms of the number of measured data points Interval scan interval x number of measurements 1 8 1 3 Alarm Function e Delay upper limit alarm T An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Delay lower limit alarm t An alarm occurs when the measured value remains below the alarm value for the specified time period delay period Delay upper limit alarm example T is the specified delay period Measured computed data xX X4 Alarm value f Alarm occurrence Alarm release Alarm does not occur at T1 because the time period is shorter than the specified delay period T The input exceeds the alarm value at X2 but the alarm occurs at X3 at which the specified delay period elapses the time when the alarm occurs is the time at X3 The input falls bel
197. er to the same value Unit Enter the unit of the computed result using up to 6 alphanumeric characters Note If the Math On Off calculation expression or span setting is changed the alarms for that channel are turned Off Constant Number Select the constants K01 to K30 that are used in the equations Value The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal point When specifying the constant using exponential notation the mantissa is less than or equal to 5 digits and the exponent less than or equal to 2 digits The selectable range is as follows 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 8 3 uondo LINd 10 LIN suoneiado pay uonouny odsy pue uoneyndwog eo 8 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags Setting Tags of Computation Channels e First CH Last CH You can assign channel numbers 31 to 42 as computation channels The range of numbers here is used to set the range of channels for setting the tag The target channels also apply to Alarm delay time TLOG and Rolling average settings e Tag Enter the tag name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Note For the Procedure in displaying tags in place of channel numbers see section 6 2 Displaying Tag Names for Channels 8 2 Starting Stopping and Resetting the Computation This section explains how to start stop computation how to reset computation and how to c
198. ernal storage medium the message Data are being saved to the medium appears 2 Open the operation key panel by pressing down on the knob that is located in the center of the upper section of the cover and pulling it forward 3 Press the eject button and remove the external storage medium For floppy disk press the FUNC key then the Media soft key The external storage medium icon in the status display section disappears Floppy Disk CF Memory Card 4 Close the operation key panel Formatting the External Storage Medium Use a formatted external storage medium This instrument formats external storage media as follows for the procedure in formatting the external storage medium see page 7 17 e Floppy disk 2HD 1 44 MB e CF memory card FDISK 1 partition hard disk format External storage media that are formatted using other instruments can be used on this instrument if the format is the same External storage media of formats other than those listed above cannot be used 3 19 suo eiado uowwog pue sapoy Aejdsiq Sued jo soweN eo Chapter 4 Measurement Input and Alarm Setup Operations 4 1 Setting Parameters Related to Measurement Inputs This section explains how to set parameters related to measurement input such as A D integral time scan interval range and filter A D Integral Time Scan Interval Burnout Detection Reference Junction Compensation Temperature Unit lt Basic Setting Mode gt
199. es e iets WE OG Gate piion total sum value pulse transistor input specifications MROMOUNMNG eiaeia i irendi Scree Mrana ee a NES TAJGO eisian ai E ES Index 4 Index lolo e E T 1 33 7 8 TAPINE wecsesestieee tows tene ate teas ta taseinaes ane 6 8 6 17 trip line TOU MMS Widi cai os evsicns cules cectanacuvadenia A 6 16 WW DG cece sevenet evesrcatiniavesvesaiaveasrisar area lersiaurararttee Type alarm TypeS Of COMPUTALIONS iriserende orride 1 42 U DCM os se ec ces A T A A User Dirata hunnide aastane USER key User name USER FOGISI ALON ereenn annaas Eae A EERS 9 5 UserlD Use Not 0 cccceeeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeenaeeesenaeeneeneeeeeeaee 9 5 V Veal a an iee eT E VERE TE 4 10 8 3 8 8 V rSION NUMDET cecsices sczcsversernersccevcevesecenterereednestostessneneinees 1 56 VOU edsin aeaniee aaaea E AEE AE 4 4 We waveform display direction ccssccescseeessresesesneesseesens 6 16 waveform display zone Waveform lime Width ccsecsscssesssteseneesseesseceeserseseteseees web browser operation 10g sscsssscsssssseseessseseeseneoes 9 9 weekly report A WIM eiriaa coverscspeds ccete vane cuateeatenacess vere satensetanss WING QAUGG scissa iesi es steeisedeatsesstzeee deste wiring alarm tail memory end 2 11 wiring measurement input e wiring remote pulse 2 14 writing MESSAGES eee eee a67 writing messages remot
200. eset Reset a Pall Reset Off The summed value is reset to 0 at every interval when Reset is On or the summed value from the start of computation is derived when Reset is Off If power is lost while the TLOG computation was in progress The TLOG computation is resumed when the power is restored The operation varies depending on whether power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create the TLOG data Time of Recovery TLOG Computation Operation After the time to create TLOG data are created immediately when power is the TLOG data restored The measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used At the next scheduled TLOG computation time data will be used from the point in time after the power was restored Before the time to create After power is restored TLOG data are created at the normally the TLOG data scheduled time to perform the TLOG computation All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the measured computed data are handled when there is an abnormality in the data Type of Abnormal Data TLOG Computation AVE MAX MIN P P SUM Positive over not used used not used Negative over not used used not used Error not used not used not used Burnout Positive over range not used used not used Burnout Negative over range not used used not used over range for measurement channels or
201. eve for 4 mm screw ee Remote input e Relay contact input non voltage contact e Transistor input open collector Pulse input e Relay contact input non voltage contact Transistor input open collector 7 7 6 Caceres BEE a a g ogo oOo oO Relay Contact Input and Transistor Input Specifications Input signal e Non voltage contact Close 200 Q or less Open 100 kQ or more e Open collector 0 5 V or less 30 mADC when turned ON leakage current of 0 25 mA or less when turned OFF Input format Photocoupler isolation shared common Dielectric strength 1000 VDC for 1 minute between the input terminal and earth Bundi pue uoneyyjeisu m 2 5 Wiring the Power Supply Precautions to Be Taken When Wiring the Power Supply Make sure to follow the warnings below when wiring the power supply Otherwise electric shock or damage to this instrument may result A To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF To prevent the possibility of fire use a power line or cord that is equivalent to 600 V PVC insulated wire AWG 18 or better Make sure to ground the protective ground terminal through a grounding resistance of less than or equal to 100 Q before turning ON the power Use cr
202. eweute ode ceaecnactenvcceeece iaaa Data istecB tach wnt a anna rain AA data acquisition data acquisition display data 0 00 cece eee 1 32 data created on this instrument eee App 13 data formats of ASCII files App 14 Data lengths ciscccssscvcseisesiecscsveiecoscerssetesecnsstecsstvetsevectesentzecress 7 3 data length 133 data SAVE esn fersisirariai irine n Da Ea E EEPE T 7 1 data size snapshot PP on ho data tO be SAVE essiensa ENR canine 7 6 Gata type iisem App 13 data used ini computations 1 42 Date tananana 7 4 8 15 date AN TINS sssrinin nierien 3 10 D y Ofthe WEEK ss ccssctstvsavstvacsadescohstivasicnisesdetecticvsdveds 7 4 8 15 daylight savings time aa 07 3 11 DOCKCASG E A gsnterseeaneeeceeeaies 4 8 digital SCRE CM eera ensestaeasebiceteteses dimensional drawings DINO CUONN 35 5c e shisnin aara or paa SSSA E Eaa direction of the bar graphs iriiritia 6 18 director name auto save Directory NAME sirce ia aiian directory NANG ssir n a E aA EEA directory name collectively saving directory name manual save ssssssssrrsisssrsreereerreerisrrases Disk Format ice asnivcr hatin e a aT DISP ENTER key display Cates ciiecscccsssescsestsccenvsicopsersesvezteasetensscxsezeseees display reference position 0 0 eee cece eee cess eeeeeeneeeeees display transition diagram display update rate displayed language sh DIVISION saeni Ea
203. explains how to change the display update rate of the trend screen Note e The display update rate cannot be changed while data acquisition is in progress e The sampling interval of the display data is also determined by the display update rate Display Update Rate lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Setup Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 3 soft key select Trend Save interval User key From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display 4 D Time div inin Auto save interval 1h User key Action Snapshot Imin 2min Smin 1 min Next 1 3 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Time div A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item Setup Items Display Update Rate e Time div Select the time corresponding to 1 division of the time axis during trend display from the following 15 s 30 s 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2 h 4h and 10 h Can be selected only on the 3 ch model Note When Auto save is set for saving data to the external storage medium the Auto save interval box is displayed under
204. external storage medium an formatting themed ciccscissncvcecwessseterssconesmessaareeueaenes WCC EE T TEA free space wes front PAN isr nessies aat ara eine EErEE tip Tle tansion logn FUNG KEY srie eneee E EEOSE Graph 6 14 6 19 UIC darts EE TT T TE 6 16 GOUNdINGVES StANCE ise toctecess tessa sci sctecvesvsseeevacebcceains 2 5 2 12 group display Group name QPOU PD NAMO kenisi NRA Group number QFOUDS AORERE H handling PFECAUTIONS siisii snieni 2 1 Header ic cscisisscsecsscizcesses historical trend hourly report how to use data Hysteresis NYSUSIOSIS ins N ii Index 2 Index l INEGI SO nhrin suannder iredi diea iiri 4 8 Indicat a sciccscssecsccessestsascnsseeyeceesses syessecteacserees cavacesscenszesvees s 4 8 initializing the setup data 3 14 input terminal DIOCKS kerisi 2 6 inserting the storage medium esssseesersrseseerrssressreernsrense 3 18 INSPECHIONS sisiisrnicsia incinin saiid installation IOCALION siarsnisiainannnnn 2 2 Instrument NUMBET scseccessecveecssevessevssincsseseaceveeteneevoancvetenets iv INSUTICIGMUS PACE sticsccxssrcecntesdenessessesaciites ced aha aaa 7 10 NOG ate ccs cepssictusesscceastenscreastes A 4 2 Interval interval for the rate of change alarm ce eee eee 4 7 K KOy eee E ASEE KOV 1OCK 622s scctsssnesceansecstcuactsniesess E Aa E Key lock icon tes key login logout key operations basi
205. f Paratmeters igsciciid ccits cides steed chia a E Aaaa App 18 Index Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions 1 1 Overview of the Paperless Recorder Measurement Input DC voltage thermocouple resistance temperature detector or ON OFF signal contact signal or voltage signal can be measured The input signal is A D converted at a scan interval and becomes a measured value of the channel In addition difference computation square root computation and scaling can be carried out on the measured data to be a measured value of the channel With the pulse measurement function PM1 option you can measure the number of pulses per unit time and pulse sum value Displaying the Measured Data The measured data acquired to the internal memory can be displayed on the operation display using trend waveforms numeric values digital values or bar graphs Trend Display Alarms Digital Display Ret o4 2003 09 16 59 lummlO Eal ot BA Gago Erali TI 181 VA 204 96 50 0 Hoa ec OUT 162 TI 205 0 975 a v Ei ec FI 183 1 286 192 5 181 57 m3 h kPa TI 181 FI 183 Va 204 TI 205 PI 206 JEEE aa 205 0 5 00 3 0 10 0 12 0 20 00 10 0 5 0 0 0 6 08 E T1 C0 y I E kPal ale am le alt 198 7 B 992 317 7 58 8 359 9 188 87 Alarms can be generated when the measured data meets a certain condition When an alarm occurs you can have the information about the alarm displayed on the
206. f rdg 0 3 C Measuring accuracy in case of scaling digits Accuracy during scaling digits measuring accuracy digits x multiplier 2 digits rounded up where the multiplier scaling span digits measuring span digits Example Assuming that range 6 V measuring span 1 000 to 5 000 V scaling span 0 000 to 2 000 Then Measuring accuracy 0 1 x 5 V 2 digits 0 005 V 5 digits 2 7 digits Multiplier 2000 digits 0 000 to 2 000 4000 digits 1 000 to 5 000 V 0 5 Accuracy during scaling 7 digits x 0 5 2 6 digits rounded up Reference junction compensation Internal External selectable for each channel Reference junction compensation accuracy above 0 C When the temperture of the input terminal is even 60 minutes or more after power on Types R S B W WRe3 25 1 C Types K J E T N L U 0 5 C Maximum allowable input voltage 10 V DC continuous for ranges of 200 mVDC or less TC RTD and DI ranges 60 V DC continuous for 2 VDC 6 VDC 20 VDC and 50 VDC ranges Input resistance Approximately 10 MQ or more for ranges of 200 mVDC or less and TC Approximately 1 MQ for 2 VDC 6 VDC 20 VDC and 50 VDC ranges 12 15 suonesoads B 12 6 General Specifications Item Specifications Input source resistance Volt TC 2 kQ or less RTD 10 Q or less per wire The resistance of all three wires must be equal Input bias current 10 nA or less without burn
207. f the three wires should be approximately equal DC current input h OO Shunt resistor NOTE For a 4 to 20 mA input use a shunt gt resistor of 250 Q 0 1 DC current input On the standard measurement input block RTD input terminals A and B are isolated on each channel Terminal b is shorted internally across all channels If you specified the three wire isolated RTD N2 option b terminals are isolated with each other Bum pue uonejjesul m 2 4 Optional Input Output Terminal Wiring General Precautions When Wiring the Input Output Signal Wires A WARNING _ e To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF e lf a voltage greater than or equal to 30 VAC 60 VDC is going to be applied to the output terminals use round crimp on lugs with insulation covers to prevent the wires from coming loose for connecting the signal wires on all output terminals In addition use double insulated wires withstand voltage of 2300 VAC or more for signal wires to which a voltage greater than or equal to 30 VAC 60 VDC is to be applied and basic insulation wires withstand voltage of 1350 VAC or more for all other signal wires To prevent the possibility of electric shock attach the terminal cover after connecting the wires and keep your hands away from the terminals AN CAUTION If a large pulling force is
208. ft key corresponding to the display you wish to show Press the up or down arrow keys to scroll the log To return to the operation screen choose DISP ENTER key menu display gt up down arrow key select screen gt DISP ENTER key Explanation A Record of Error Messages Error Log The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs 002 002 Tine No Hessage Jan 31 2001 07 23 33 218 Media has not been inser Jan 31 2001 07 23 23 681 Neasured data have been Error message Error code Date and time of occurrence For details on error messages see chapter 10 A List of Messages 9 8 9 4 Displaying a List of Record of Errors and Operations Displaying Logs Login logout Log The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs 003 003 Time 170 No User Name Jan 31 2001 07 13 15 In l userl Jan 31 2081 07 12 58 Out Jan 31 2061 67 12 46 In l Rie User name User registration No Date time Login logout Communication Command Log The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs 888 008 Time ID I 0 Message Link I Ethernet interface Jan 31 2001 67 23 33 1 Logout Green Good connection Jan 31 2001 07 23 23 1 gt CC Gray No connection Message I O symbol gt input lt output A number used to identify the user that is connected Date and time when the acce
209. g pue s pon Aejdsiq Sued Jo soweN e 3 3 Setting the Date and Time This section explains how to set the date time and the daylight savings function of this instrument internal clock Date and Time lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display e Setting the date and time MENU key switch to setting mode gt 8 soft key select Time From the operation mode use the above keys to open the Time set pop up window gt BEML YY MM DD HH MM SS DST AE Suner e Setting daylight savings time MENU key switch to setting mode gt 6 soft key select File DST From the operation mode use the above keys to open the File DST set dialog box et p5 2003 09 22 15 igor EEC Directory name DATA 103 Daylight saving time lt YYZMMZDD HH Summer 80 01 01 0A Winter on 80701701 60 On Off Setup Procedure e Setting the Date and Time 1 Press the Input soft key while the cursor is on YY MM DD HH MM SS The number keypad appears and the cursor blue moves to the YY section i foie mes 0 YYZMMZDD HH MM SS DST 10705 09 21 11 Summer a PER EEREE 2 Enter the date time using the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor blue the up and down arrow keys to select a number 3 3 Setting the Date and Time Press the DISP ENTER key The keypad disappears and the cursor blue returns to the YY MM DD HH MM SS box To set the Summer Winter time go to step 5 below
210. h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h or 24h 24h Scheduled E Mail settings gt Ref time 00 00 to 23 59 00 00 Scheduled E Mail settings gt Recipient2 On Off Off Scheduled E Mail settings gt Interval 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h or 24h 24h Scheduled E Mail settings gt Ref time 00 00 to 23 59 00 00 Scheduled E Mail settings gt Include Include instan On Off Off Scheduled E Mail settings gt Include source URL On Off Off Scheduled E Mail settings gt Subject Scheduled E Mail settings gt Header1 Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Periodic_data App 24 Appendix 6 List of Parameters Scheduled E Mail settings gt Header2 Up to 64 alphanumeric characters App 25 xipueddy E Appendix 6 List of Parameters lt 5 System E Mail Settings gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value System E Mail settings gt Recipient1 On Off Off System E Mail settings gt Recipient2 On Off Off System E Mail settings gt Include source URL On Off Off System E Mail settings gt Subject System E Mail settings gt Header1 System E Mail settings gt Header2 Up to 32 alphanumeric characters Up to 64 alphanumeric characters Up to 64 alphanumeric characters System_warning lt 6 Report E Mail Settings gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Report E Mail settings gt Recipient On Off Off Report E Mail settings gt Recipient2 On Off Off Report E M
211. h as electric switchboards 12 14 12 6 General Specifications Standard Performance Item Specifications Measuring accuracy The following specifications apply to operation of this instrument under standard operation conditions Temperature 23 2 C Humidity 55 10 RH Power supply voltage 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC Power supply frequency 50 60 Hz 1 Warm up time At least 30 minutes Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation of this instrument Measurement accuracy digital display Max resolution of digital display 0 1 of rdg 2 digits DC voltage 0 1 of rdg 3 digits 0 15 of rdg 1 C However R S 3 7 C at 0 to 100 C 1 5 C at 100 to 300 C B 2 C at 400 to 600 C TC Accuracy at less than 400 C is not guaranteed Excluding the 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C Ahi However 0 15 of rdg 1 C at 200 to 100 C compensation 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C accuracy 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C 0 15 of rdg 1 C 0 15 of rdg 0 5 C However 0 15 of rdg 0 7 C at 200 to 100 C 0 2 of rdg 2 C Pt100 JPt100 DCV input Threshold level accuracy 2 4 V 0 1 V Contact input 1 KQ or less ON 100 KQ or more OFF Parallel capacitance 0 01 uF or less 0 15 o
212. he pulse sum value channels Equation for figuring the total sum value K01 32 34 The total sum value is the product of the reset value KO1 and the reset count 32 plus the pulse sum value 34 Note Previously Calculated Value and Current Calculated Value The calculation is performed in order starting from the smallest numbered channels e If channel numbers in equations are smaller than the channel numbers of channels for setting equations the current calculated result current value is used for the channel numbers in equations If channel numbers in equations are greater than or equal to the channel numbers of channels for setting equations the previously calculated result previous value is used for the channel numbers in equations Example Equation for CH32 32 31 31 was already calculated so the current value is used 32 has not yet been calculated so the previous value is used App 12 Appendix 4 Types of Data Created on this instrument and Their Uses This section explains how to use data created on this instrument Data Acquisition to When Saving to the External Storage Medium Display Using the Internal File Name Extension Format Recorder Software Appli Memory Display data Yes Mddhhmma DDS BINARY Undisclosed Yes Yes Yes 1 Event data Yes Mddhhmma DEV BINARY Undisclosed Yes Yes Yes Report data Yes Mddhhmma DHR hourly ASCII see appendix 5 Yes Yes Yes Mddhhmma DDR da
213. he Messages e Characters Enter the message string using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Up to 8 messages can be entered No 1 to 8 6 6 6 4 Writing Messages on the Trend Screen Writing Messages lt Operation Mode gt You cannot write messages if acquisition to the internal memory is stopped 1 Press the FUNC key A soft key meni is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Message soft key to display a list of messages A soft key menu used to select the message appears e EaR 206 il FSET Hessage2 Nessage3Nessaged PikNext 1 2 3 Press the soft key corresponding to the message you wish to write A message mark time and the message itself are displayed on the trend display and the information is written to the internal memory Message mark time message Note This operation can be assigned to the USER key If it is the message is written simply by pressing a single key For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 9 1 Explanation Displayed Colors of the Message The message colors on the trend screen are shown below They cannot be changed Message Number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Displayed Color Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow green Light blue 6 7 s u uo peAe dsiq ay BuiBueyy 104 suoeiaodo al 6 5 Displaying a Line to Indicate a Particular Value of Interest Trip Line on the Trend Screen This section explains how to set the
214. he background color the waveform line width the trip line width and the number of grids Waveform Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 4 soft key select View Direction LCD From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display View Direction Brightness 2 es h Saver Timedtt graph Vertical 3 Cr Background White iias ire Trend line 2 dot Restore KeytAlm Trip line 2 dot Grid 10 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit Normal Horizon Nertical Horizon2 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Waveform Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Width Trip Line Width Grid e Direction e Trend Select the display direction of the trends from Horizontal Vertical initial value and Horizon2 If Hor
215. he down arrow key while displaying the trend digital or bar graph screen to switch the screen in the order trend digital bar graph trend and so on Press the up arrow key to switch the screen in reverse order Trend screen 4 2003 o9 16 50h gt ENO Down arrow ra 50 8 352 8 187 15ure P ies Ne Digital screen sat p4 2003 09 18 40 MIP Era ot Bd 2003 PERS usi Erag TI 181 VA 204 TI 181 FI 163 A 264 T1 285 P 1 206 96 3 50 HHL IL HA 20 0 5 00 35 0 105 0 1208 8 20 00 HOw ec z lt OUT 182 TI 285 0 975 326 1 Rr vma c FI 183 PI 286 1 92 5 1 81 57 10 0 5 00 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 03 C 1 E VI E mh E 21 0 1 E kPal n3 h H H kPa 198 7 8 992 317 7 58 8 359 9 188 87 5 3 su 19 5 uoea do y UO SUOI e19dO K 5 2 Displaying All Channels on a Screen Overview Screen Overview Screen lt Operation Mode gt For details see section 1 4 Display Function Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the overview screen CURSOR OFF Clears the cursor CURSOR ON Displays the cursor JUMP TO TREND Displays the trend screen of the group containing the channel selected using the cursor JUMP TO BAR Displays the bar graph screen of the
216. he external storage medium Selecting No and pressing the DISP ENTER key does not save the remaining data Note The data saving operation is interrupted in five minutes after the message Exchange media to continue was displayed The message Memory save to media was interrupted will be displayed in this case The remaining data can be saved to the external storage medium by another manual save operation Name of the Directory to Which to Save the Data For the setting procedure of the directory to which to save the data see section 7 1 Each time the storage medium is inserted into the drive and the data is saved the sequence number of the directory name increments by one Example When the specified directory name is DATAO the first set of data are saved to DATA0 000 and the second set of data are saved to DATA0 001 When the directory name is changed the sequence number is reset to zero When the data are divided and saved over multiple external storage media due to lack of space on the storage medium the same directory name is used If the specified directory already exists in the external storage medium an error message is displayed and the operation terminates data are not saved 7 12 7 3 Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Only for Models with an External Storage Medium Drive Collectively Saving Data When Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory Is Stopped lt Operation Mode gt Save
217. he message Exchange media to continue the saving operation appears Replace the storage medium For floppy disk press the FUNC key then press the Media soft key The remaining data is saved to the external storage medium at the time for the next auto save execution Saving Data Using FUNC Key Operation This operation allows you to save data to the external storage medium at arbitrary times when the auto save is specified and the data acquisition has been started 1 Press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Save Display or Save Event soft key The display data or event data in the internal memory is saved to the external storage medium Save E Hail Display test FTPtest Note SO If you press the FUNC key when Save under Memory is set to Auto and the acquisition of the display data to the internal memory is started Save Display appears in the soft key menu If you press the FUNC key when the acquisition of event data to the internal memory is started in the free mode Save Event appears in the soft key menu 7 10 7 3 Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Only for Models with an External Storage Medium Drive Explanation Auto Save The data in the internal memory is saved to the storage medium automatically Auto Save and Data Save Using Key Operation If you carry out the key operation to save data during auto save mode
218. he sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 9 999999E 99 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the equation was specified is reflected in the maximum minimum and instantaneous values For example if the span setting of the equation is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 App 17 xipueddy 3 Appendix 6 List of Parameters Below is a list of parameters for the model with the various function options Basic Setting Mode Setup Node Basic setting mode A D Temperature rem Keylock a Hemory o Key login Hemory and trend Memory timeup 3 Save Load Initialize 5 E 7 Setup Mode Basic setting mode 3 Option SEE Communication en Web E Mail iy End 9 18 11 End 1 Alarm Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Alarm gt Reflash On Off Off Alarm gt Relay gt AND None 101 101 102 101 103 or 101 106 None Alarm gt Relay gt Action Energize or De_energize Energize Alarm gt Relay gt Behavior Hold or Nonhold Nonhold Alarm gt Indicator Hold or Nonhold Nonhold Alarm gt Rate of change gt Increase Decrease 1to 15 1 Alarm gt Hysteresis On Off On 2 A D Temperature Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value A D gt Integrate 3 ch model Auto 50 Hz or 60 Hz Auto 6 ch and 12 ch model Auto
219. iew LD Direction Brightness 2 Ha h oe Saver Timedtf sreph Verticel ia Background White Time th Trend line 2 dot Restore Key Alm Trip line 2 dot Grid 10 div Scroll time ER Scale digit Normal 5s 18s 26s ELE Imin Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Scroll time A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Setup Items Automatic Switching Interval of the Displayed Groups e Scroll time Select the interval used when automatically switching the displayed groups on the trend digital and bar graph screens from 5s 10s 20s 30s and 1min The displayed group rotates among group 1 to group 4 6 20 6 12 Displaying Partially Expanded Waveforms This section explains how to display the waveform using the partial expanded display function on the trend screen Enabling Disabling the Partial Expanded Display Function lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 5 soft key select Aux Time zone From the operation mode u
220. igure this instrument Monitor the measured data Read the setup data or measured data from this instrument Read files on the storage medium of this instrument You can also carry out the following types of operations by using the Ethernet communication interface C7 e Transmit the measured data in units of files to the FTP server on the network e Retrieve the files on the storage medium of this instrument from a PC on the network e Display the screen of this instrument on a Web browser on a PC Transmit e mail messages to preset recipients when events such as alarm generations occur Recorder PC Retrieves files on the external storage medium Displays the screen of the recorder on a Web browser lt gt Transmits e mail messages Primary Secondary The communication functions using the Ethernet or serial interface are not covered in this manual See the communication Interface user s manual 9499 040 75611 Recorder Standard Software By using the Recorder Standard Software that comes standard with this instrument the following operations are possible e Displaying the measured data e Converting the measured data to ASCII Lotus or Excel formats e Configuring the setup file for this instrument See the software s manual 9499 040 77411 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Number of Measurement Channels Scan Interval The number of measurement channels and scan in
221. ily Mddhhmma DWR weekly Mddhhmma DMR monthly Manual sampled data Yes Mddhhmma DMN ASCII see appendix 5 Yes TLOG data Yes Mddhhmma DTG BINARY Undisclosed Yes Yes Setup data Yes specified string PNL BINARY Undisclosed Yes Yes Alarm summary Yes Yes Yes Yes Message summary Yes Yes Yes Yes Screen image data No Mddhhmma PNG PNG general format Yes Software Recorder Standard Software Appli Application program 1 If the data format is converted using Recorder Standard Software it can be viewed on common software applications such as Microsoft Excel 2 With the communication function optional you can read data from this instrument and view it using application software File Name Mddhhmm denotes the date and time Mddhhmm of setup data and screen image data is the date and time the file was created Mddhhmm of other data is the date and time the first data was sampled M Month 1 9 X October Y November Z December dd day hh hour mm minute a denotes the last digit of the year 0 to 9 However a becomes a sequence number for the following case It takes a value between A and Z For example if the acquisition of the display data is started and stopped and started again within 1 minute by pressing the START key the two file names are the same up to Mddhhmm month day hour and minute In this case the second file is assigned the sequence number A Example 701
222. imit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is below or equal to the new setting If the input is greater than the new setting the alarm turns OFF 1 9 suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 3 Alarm Function Alarm Hysteresis You can set a width hysteresis to the values used to activate and release alarms Alarm hysteresis prevents frequent activation and release of alarms when the measured value is unstable around the alarm value The hysteresis is fixed to 0 5 of the measurement span display scale width if the range is set to scale It is applied only on alarms set to upper lower limit alarm on measurement channels The function can be turned ON OFF The initial value is set to On use hysteresis The setting applies to all measurement channels Upper Limit Alarm H Alarm occurrence Alarm value Hysteresis approx 0 5 Alarm release Measured value Lower Limidt Alarm L Alarm release Measured value Hysteresis approx 0 5 Alarm value occurrence Alarm Indication The alarm conditions are displayed as alarm icons in the status display section and through the trend digital bar graph overview and other screens The detailed information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary Alarm Indication Example Overview screen pet od vapa 09 21 si hemo MEMEO 9 Channel No or tag name Alarm type Area of channels on which an alarm is occurri
223. imp on lugs with isolation sleeves for 4 mm screws for power supply wires and protective grounding wires To prevent the possibility of electric shock make sure to close the cover transparent for the power supply wires Furnish a switch double pole type to separate this instrument from the main power supply in the power supply line In addition make sure to indicate that the switch is a power control for this instrument on the switch and the ON OFF positions of the switch Switch Specifications Steady state current rating 1 A or more inrush current rating 60 A or more Use a switch complied with IEC60947 1 and 3 Connect a fuse between 2 A and 15 A in the power supply line Use a fuse approved by CSA for the use in North America or VDE for the use in Europe Do not add a switch or fuse to the ground line Use a power supply that meets the following conditions Except for P1 model Item Specification Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC Supply voltage range used 90 to 132 180 to 264 VAC Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range Maximum power consumption 50 60 Hz 2 25 VA 100 V 35 VA 240 V P1 model Item Specification Rated supply voltage Supply voltage range used Rated supply voltage frequency Permitted supply voltage frequency range Maximum power consumption 24 VDC AC 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC 50 60 Hz for AC 50 60 Hz 2 for AC
224. in 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A user name list window and a soft key menu appears 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the user to be logged in User name list Enter setup Userl userl Enable User2 Enable User3 Userd User5 If UserID Use Not is set to Use in the key login settings a User ID entry pop up window appears Proceed to step 3 If it is set to Not proceed to step 4 3 Enter the User ID using the soft keys and arrow keys then press the DISP ENTER key User name userl User ID HH ABCDEFGHIJ KLHNOPQ RST UVUXY2R 0 EASSAL 9 3 Using Key Login Logout Function Explanation 4 Enter the password using the soft keys and arrow keys then press the DISP ABCDEFGHI J KLHNOPQRST UVWXYZRa a A gA Pavesi AE If the password is correct the user is logged in and the user name appears in the status indication section as shown below User name Logging out Manual logout 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Logout soft key The user name in the status indication section disappears Auto logout If the auto logout function is enabled users are automatically logged out when there is no key operation for 10 minutes in operation mode or setting mode Logging In Logging Out e When logged out only the login operation can be accessed If th
225. in the internal memory exceeds 16 TLOG data is overwritten even if the number of data sets is less than 400 The number of TLOG data sets in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary See section 1 4 1 35 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 5 Data Storage Function Report Data M1 PM1 Option The average or instantaneous value and maximum minimum and sum can be computed for the specified channels at the preset interval and the result can be acquired to the internal memory Reports are created from the time the data acquisition is started till the data acquisition is stopped Reports are created at each time interval one hour for hourly report one day for daily report etc and when the data acquisition is stopped You can select report type from hourly daily hourly and daily daily and weekly or daily and monthly a Start The interval time for the report creation 1 hour 1 day 1week or 1 month writing data to internal memory Stop writing data memoj te T2 l t1 t2 tn tn 1 Time ae gt I I I I I I The average or instantaneous data maximum minimum and sum for th specified channels stored to the internal memory Up to 40 data sets can be stored in the internal memory When this number is exceeded data are overwritten from the oldest data For hourly only this constitutes 40 minutes of report data For daily monthly this constitutes 39 daily reports an
226. ing an integer in the range of 1 to 3600 s Note e Ifthe scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay it will operate at the specified period 1 s Example If the alarm delay set to 5 s the function will operate at 6 s e For a description of the alarm delay setting of computation channels see section 8 3 Setting Alarms on Computation Channels Releasing Alarm Output AlarmACK lt Operation Mode gt The following operation is valid only when Behavior is set to Hold or Indicator is set to Hold in basic setting mode 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the AlarmACK soft key Hanual sample Nedia AlarmACK Message Note This operation can be assigned to the USER key If it is alarms can be cleared simply by pressing a single key For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 9 1 Explanation Alarm Output Release Alarm ACK Operation When you perform the alarm ACK procedure all alarm displays and relay outputs A1 A2 A3 option are released However this procedure is not valid if the alarm display output relay operation is set to non hold This cancellation procedure can be performed via remote control R1 PM1 option or via communication interface For information about remote entry of settings see section 9 6 Using the Remote Control Function R1 PM Option For i
227. ing figure Two mounting brackets are used at the top and bottom or left and right of the case remove the seal covering the holes of the mounting brackets on the case beforehand The adequate tightening torque of the screws for the panel mounting brackets is 0 8 to 1 2 N m CAUTION Tightening the screws with a torque greater than the adequate tightening torque can cause deformation of the case or damage to the bracket Panel Cut Diagram Unit mm approx inches Single Unit Mounting Side by Side Mounting Side by Side Mounting horizontally vertically max 3units 1373 137 3 5 39 5 39 a PHIS Ela NIM o cay rd 2 Le DS Yo a 282 426 il 570 714 175Min 858 6 89 1002 1146 1290 1434 144xn 6 Panel Mounting Diagram Mounting Bracket B9900BX Attachment position is either top and bottom or left and right Bum pue uonejjesul m 2 2 Installation External Dimensions of this instrument Unit mm for oa
228. ion is determined by the Scale Lower setting 4 5 suoie1 do dnjyes wuejy pue yndu juowsinseoyy a 4 1 Setting Parameters Related to Measurement Inputs Note This instrument converts the measured value to a value obtained by removing the decimal point from the value range specified by Scale Lower and Scale Upper In other words if the Scale setting is 5 to 5 the value is converted to a value within the span of 10 if the Scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 the value is converted to a value within a span of 100 In this case the resolution of the value converted to a span of 10 is lower than the value converted to a span of 100 To prevent the display from becoming coarse set the Scale setting so that this value is greater than 100 as much as possible You cannot set the same value to Scale_L and Scale_U When set to Sqrt square root computation Select this mode when computing the square root of the DC voltage input and converting the computed result to a value with an appropriate unit for displaying Select the input range from 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V and 50V Then set Span Lower Upper measurement span of the input as well as Scale Lower Upper and Unit after the conversion The selectable range of Span_L and Span_U is that of the specified input range The selectable range of Scale_L and Scale _U is 30000 to 30000 The decimal point posit
229. ion can be set to X XXXX XX XXX XXX XX XXXX X or XXXXX The decimal point position is determined by the Scale_L setting Setting the Filter The filter can be set on the 3 ch model First CH Last CH Select the channel for setting the filter Filter Select the time constant for a low pass filter from 2 s 5 s or 10 s Setting the Moving Average The moving average can be set on the 6 ch and 12 ch model First CH Last CH Select the channel for setting the moving average Moving average Count Select the sampling data count of the moving average from 2 to 16 Note Regardless of this setting filter and moving average operations are not performed for the digital inputs DI 4 2 Setting Alarm Related Parameters This section explains how to set alarms for each channel how to set alarm output relay A1 A2 or A3 option action and how to clear the alarm outputs when they occur Alarm Output Relay Action Alarm Indication Interval for the Rate of Change Alarm Alarm Hysteresis lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 1 soft key select Alarm From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Node Alarm Reflash Relay AND None Action Energize Behavior Nonhold Indicator Nonhold Rate of chang
230. ion is not carried out in the basic setting mode and you cannot release the alarm output relay 1 4 Display Function Describes screens in the operation mode Common Items Related to the Display 5 5 TFT Color This instrument has a 5 5 TFT color LCD 240 by 320 dot resolution The screen consists of the status display section and the data display section 96 3 HAHA c 192 5 m3 h OuT 182 T1205 i 0 975 326 1 Rr v aa c FI 103 PI 206 e Status Display Section Status display section Data display section Displays the displayed screen name date and time internal memory external storage medium usage condition alarm condition user name when using the key login function computation condition M1 PM1 option status of key lock function and e mail transmission function C7 option Data Display Section Displays measured data using numerical values waveforms bar graphs and so on Shows the setup screen when setting functions Group Display The data displayed on the trend digital and bar graph screens are the data of measurement or computation channels that are assigned to the group Up to 6 channels can be assigned to a single group Up to 4 groups can be registered The groups are common to the trend digital and bar graph screens On the trend digital and bar graph screens the displayed groups can be automatically switched at 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s or 1 min i
231. ion select Use e Auto logout On Automatically logs the user out if there is no key operation for ten minutes Off The user stays logged on until the user manually logs out e UserID Use Not Set whether to use the User ID when logging in If Use is selected the User ID entry box appears 9 5 suonuny 19410 JO suoneado e 9 3 Using Key Login Logout Function Number Select the user registration number from 1 to 7 Off On Select whether to enable On or disable Off the key login function of the user corresponding to the registration number User name Enter the user name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters You cannot specify quit as a user name In addition the user name cannot be set to all spaces If the user name already exists a message This username is already registered appears In this case change the user name to a unique name User ID only when UserID Use Not is set to Use Enter the user ID using up to 4 alphanumeric characters Password Set the password using up to 6 alphanumeric characters Enter setup Select whether to allow the user that has logged in to enter basic setting mode Enable or not Disable Note You cannot set all users to Disable If you attempt to do so the user with the smallest registration number is automatically changed to Enable at the time the setup data is saved Logging In Logging Out lt Operation Mode gt Procedure Logging
232. ions TLOG Computation MAX MIN AVE SUM MAX MIN Only measured data and computed data can be used in the TLOG computation In the explanation below e1 is used to represent a measurement or computation channel You cannot specify an equation that contains a computing element inside e1 In addition only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single computing equation TLOG MAX Syntax TLOG MAX e1 Result Computes the maximum value of channel e1 TLOG MIN Syntax TLOG MIN e1 Result Computes the minimum value of channel e1 TLOG AVE Syntax TLOG AVE e1 Result Computes the average value of channel e1 TLOG SUM Syntax TLOG SUM e1 Result Computes the summation of channel e1 TLOG P P Syntax TLOG P P e1 Result Computes the maximum value minimum value of channel e1 An Example of Computing Equations TLOG MAX 01 K01xSQR 02 Examples of Computing Equations That Are Not Allowed TLOG AVE 01 TLOG AVE 02 Reason TLOG appears twice in one equation TLOG AVE ABS 01 Reason A computing element is used inside the parentheses App 10 Appendix 3 Pulse Measurement Setting Example Pulse Sum Value Reset If It Exceeds Application Equation a Fixed Value PM1 Option This is a description of how to enter settings so that the pulse sum value will reset exceeds a previously set value Pulse Sum Value Reset if it The pulse sum value resets if it exceeds a previously se
233. is instrument is switched from basic setting mode to operation mode this instrument is in a logged out condition When the power is turned OFF and turned ON again this instrument starts in the logged out condition The records of key login logout can be viewed on the log screen See section 9 4 Saving the User Name When starting stopping the acquisition of the display data event data to the internal memory the user name is written to the respective files The user name when writing messages is also written to the internal memory suonuny 19410 Jo suoneado e 9 4 Displaying a List of Record of Errors and Operations Displaying Logs Open the log display when checking the following operation information Error message login logout log communication command log FTP file transfer log E mail transmission log and Web browser operation log This section explains how to display the above information A List of Record of Errors and Operations Log Display lt Operation Mode gt Opening the Log Display 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display Hath STOP Snap Keylock akon Log Next 2 3 2 Press the Log soft key The following soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display Login and Web soft keys appear only when those functions are being used pot as 2003 06 56 54 lato aCA Error Commu FIP System E Mail 3 Press the so
234. is optional N3 option Note For converting a current signal to a voltage signal three shunt resistors are provided see Optional Accessories Sold Separately on page v A 250 W shunt resistor for example is used to convert a 4 to 20 mA to a 1 to 5 V Measurable Range and Measurement Span You can specify an arbitrary range for a measurement span within the measurable range and display the measured data Measurable range Example TC Type R 1760 0 C Measurement span 1500 0 C Upper limit of the measurement span 300 0 C 0 0 C Lower limit of the measurement span 1 3 suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Difference Computation The value obtained by subtracting the measured value of another channel this channel is called a reference channel from the input value becomes a measured value of the channel Difference computation Input value value Measured value of the reference channel Note Even if the input type or the measurement range of the difference computation channel and the reference channel is not the same the difference computation is performed according to the following rules e When the decimal position between the reference channel and the difference computation channel is different the measured value of the reference channel is adjusted to the decimal position of the measured value of the difference computation channel to make th
235. isplay data 900 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the max data no is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the max data no is 120 000 Note To estimate the maximum sampling length use the table showing the maximum number of data points per channel on pages App 4 and App 5 App 2 Appendix 1 Time Estimate for Writing Display Event Data to the Internal Memory Calculation example Display Data Only Measurement channel 2 computation channel none Data Max data no and sampling length Display data Max data no 1 200 000 2 CH x 4 bytes 0 x 8 bytes 150 000 However since 100 000 data points is the limit Max data no 100 000 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 100 000 data points x 60 s 6 000 000 s approx 69 days Measurement channel 12 computation channel 6 Data Max data no and sampling length Display data Max data no 1 200 000 12 CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 12 500 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 12 500 data points x 60 s 750 000 s approx 8 days Event Data Only Measurement
236. isplay data Max data no 900 000 12 CH x 4 bytes 6 x 8 bytes 9 375 When the display update rate is 30 min div 60 s sampling interval Sampling length 9 375 data points x 60 s 562 500 s approx 6 5 days Event data Max data no 300 000 12 CH x 2 bytes 6 x 4 bytes 6 250 When the event data sampling interval is 1 s Sampling length 6 250 data points x 1 s 6 250 s approx 1 7 hours App 3 xipueddy 3 Appendix 1 Time Estimate for Writing Display Event Data to the Internal Memory Lists of Maximum Number of Data Points per Channel The table below shows the maximum number of data points per channel per number of measurement computation channels to which data is saved The maximum sampling length is calculated by multiplying that number by the sampling interval For example when acquiring display data on 3 measurement channels and 3 computation channels only at a sampling interval of 4 seconds look up the maximum number of data points per channel value in table 1 that corresponds to 3 measurement channels and 3 computation channels 333333 and input that value into the following equation Max sampling length 33333 x 4 133332 seconds approximately 37 hours Table 1 Display data only Number of Number of Measurement Channels Computation Ch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 100000 100000 100000 75000 60000 50000 42857 37500 33333 30000 27273 25000 100000 75000 60000 50000 42857 37500 33
237. isplayed on the historical trend can be displayed When the del function is disabled When the oul function is enabled suoloun jo uoneueldxy a i ae File Name Data Kind File name and data type display data or event data Serial No Serial number of this instrument that acquired the data Start Time End Time Time at which data acquisition is started stopped Start User Name Stop User Name Name of the user who carried out the operation user name is displayed only when the key login function is used Half Screen Display Only When Displaying the Historical Trend of the Display Data Using up and down arrow keys you can have a half of the display show the historical data of the display data and the other half show the display data currently being measured Current ternd Historical trend Current channel information Setting the Display Condition of the LCD The following display conditions of the LCD can be configured Display Attribute Setting Background color of The background color of the display can be set to white or black The initial the operation display setting of the control operation display is Black the initial setting of the measurement operation display is White LCD brightness The brightness of the LCD can be set between eight levels The initial setting is 2 Backlight saver The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically dimming the light when there is no
238. itch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 3 soft key select Zone Graph Partial or 6 soft key select Math Zone Graph Partial From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display For measurement channels For computation channels m1 PM1 option Bet 05 2003 99 45 49 POF Bot p5 2003 09 46 52 POP EEM C First CH fal Last CH far First CH 1 Last CH Zone Partial Zone Partial Lower as Expand 50 Lower ao Expand 50 8 Upper ioa Boundary 6 000 Upper iao g Boundary Graph Graph Division fia Division fia Bar graph Normal Bar graph Normal Scale position 1 Scale position 1 On Off On Off Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note Expand and Boundary under Partial are set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box 6 12 Displaying Partially Expanded Waveforms Detailed Setting of the Partial Expanded Display
239. its or less Input source resistance Volt range With variation of 1 kQ Ranges of 200 mV or less within 10 mV Ranges of 2 V or greater 0 1 of rdg or less TC range With variation of 1 kQ Within 10 uV 100 uV when the burnout detection function is switched on RTD range Pt100 With variation of 10 per wire resistance of all three wires must be equal 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less With maximum difference of 40 mQ between wires approximately 0 1 C RTD range Pt1000 With variation of 10 Q per wire resistance of all three wires must be equal 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less With maximum difference of 400 mQ between wires approximately 0 1 C N3 option Other Specifications Item Specifications Clock With calendar function year of grace The time can be adjusted by a remote input remote control option Daylight saving Summer and wintertime can be set Accuracy of clock 100 ppm excluding a delay of 1 second maximum caused each time the power is turned on Memory backup A built in lithium battery backs up the setup parameters battery life approximately ten years at room temperature Key lock function ON OFF and password can be set Key login function Logs in using user name user ID and password USER key Executes various actions assigned 12 16 12 7 Dimensional Drawings
240. izon2 is selected the trends scale and numerical display section are arranged as shown below GROUP 1 Oct Ad 2683 18 28 29 6 16 6 9 Setting the Waveform Display Direction Background Color Waveform Line Background Select the background color for measurement displays such as the trend screen digital screen bar graph screen and information display from White initial value and Black Note The background color of the historical trend is set opposite to that of the trend screen Trend line Select the line width of the trends from 1 2 and 3 dots Trip line Select the line width of trip lines from 1 2 and 3 dots Grid Select the number of grids to be displayed in the waveform display area of the trend screen Select from Auto 4 to 12 If 4 to 12 is selected the grid is displayed so that the display width is divided into 4 to 12 sections If Auto is selected the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the first assigned channel of the group is displayed Number of lines is specified _ by the Grid setting s u juo peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suonesado al 6 10 Changing the Display of Bar Graphs This section explains how to set the bar graph base position and the display direction of the bar graphs Bar graph Base Position Direction of the Bar Graphs lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display e Set
241. key operation for a certain amount of time The display returns to the original brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence The initial setting is set so that the backlight saver is disabled 1 27 1 5 Data Storage Function This section describes the types of data that can be created and how to save them Data Type and Data File Data types and corresponding files are as follows Type Content Display data Waveform data that have been sampled at a specified sampling interval and displayed on the trend display The maximum and minimum values from measured computed data within the sampling intervals are held A header string can be written into the display data file a character string that is common to all data files Alarm and message information is held Data format Binary format undisclosed File name Mddhhmma DDS Event data The measured computed data are acquired at the specified sampling interval There is a mode in which the data acquisition is started when a trigger occurs or another mode in which the data is acquired continuously The header string can be written into the event data file a character string that is common to all data files Alarm and message information is held Data format Binary format undisclosed File name Mddhhmma DEV Manual sampled data Every time a key that executes manual sampling is pressed the measured computed data of all channels at tha
242. l data length and at every specified date time 1 32 1 5 Data Storage Function Mode Description Trigger When the internal memory is not divided into blocks One event data file is created in the internal memory Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length and the operation is stopped At this point the acquisition does not start even if the trigger is activated Data acquisition oN i Trigger wait i Trigger activated Stop When the internal memory is divided into blocks An event data file each in the block is created Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length and the operation is stopped When the trigger is activated again data are acquired and stored to the next block When all blocks are full no more acquisition takes place First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition AN i AN i i Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wail 1 1 gt Trigger activated Trigger activated i gt Trigger activated Stop Rotate Note When the internal memory is not divided into blocks One event data file is created in the internal memory Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger i
243. larm ACK Alarm ACK Alarm Occurrence Release i For a description on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 3 Alarm Function suoloun jo uoneuejdxg a 1 4 Display Function Digital Display The measured data are ae using numerical values in large size Tiii aE Tag channel no P 3 50 YW Measured value Hon Unit OUT 182 TI 285 0 975 326 1 RE via c FI 183 P 286 192 5 181 57 n3 h H 4 kPa Alarm mark Updating of the Numerical Display Numerical display is updated every second However when the scan interval on the 6 ch and 12 ch model is 2 s the update rate is also 2 s Note e Numerical Display of Measurement Channels Common to Trend Digital and Bar Graph Displays When the measured values of measurement channels are over range see below the measured values are indicated as Over or Over If a burnout is detected on a channel assigned to the burnout detection function Burnout is displayed for the measured value Otherwise a numerical value is displayed Over Range of Measurement Channels e For DC voltage input over range occurs when the measured value of the measurement channel exceeds 5 of the measurable range For example the measurable range when the measurement range is 2 V is 2 000 to 2 000 V If the measured value exceeds 2 200 V over range occurs if the measured value falls below 2 200 V over
244. larm delay time Set the alarm delay using an integer in the range of 1 to 8600 s Note If the scan interval is 2 s and you set an odd value for the alarm delay period it will operate at the specified period 1 s Example If the alarm delay set to 5 s the function will operate at 6 s 8 4 Setting the Timer for Statistical Computations TLOG Computation and Data Save TLOG Data This section explains how to set the timer that can be used for TLOG computation and how to set data save at intervals specified by the timer Timer Data Save TLOG Data lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 9 soft key select Option gt 3 soft key select Timer TLOG From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Timer lt TLOG gt Number Hode lAbsolute Interval th Ref time o 00 Reset ot Action off 1 je E Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The Interval under Relative timer and
245. larm output relay when the alarm occurs By selecting de energize the alarm output relay will operate in the same manner as when the alarm occurs when the power supply is disrupted Energize or de energize applies to all alarm output relays The initial value is set to Energize Energize De energize NO NO Cc NC When power is turned OFF When no alarm occurs When an alarm occurs NO Normally opened C common NC normally closed Hold Non Hold Operation of the Alarm Output Relay There are two methods in operating the alarm output relay e Turns OFF the output relay when the cause of the alarm is no longer met non hold e Holds the output relay ON until the alarm acknowledge operation is executed hold Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Occurrence Alarm JIL TL TiL Release n Activated T L m Eag Output Relay Released Note If the reflash alarm is turned ON 101 to 103 are set to non hold Specifying hold produces no effect Alarm Output Release Alarm ACK Operation When you perform the alarm ACK procedure all alarm displays and relay outputs A1 A2 A3 option are released However this procedure is not valid if the alarm display output relay operation is set to non hold This cancellation procedure can be performed using FUNC key or USER key or via remote control R1 PM1 option Note When the basic setting mode is entered the activated released condition of the previous alarm output relay is held Alarm detect
246. lay data and the event data to the internal memory Data type selected in the memory summary Selecting the Type of File Display Data or Event Data to Display in the Memory Summary This operation is carried out on the memory summary screen Select display data or event data using the left and right arrow keys The selected file type is indicated by a green circle to the left of DISPLAY DATA or EVENT DATA Information about the selected file is displayed You can select display data or event data when both data reside in the internal memory Soo Ez Data type Factor yp mb Oct 25 14 17 22 Oct 65 14 18 08 24 Stor Oct 65 14 10 10 Oct 6 14 15 44 168 Stoe Oct g5 14 00 10 Oct 66 14 10 08 Auto Save Oct 65 13 59 10 Oct 65 14 00 03 SB Auto Save Oct 65 13 40 10 Oct 66 13 59 08 3B Auto Save Oct 65 13 39 10 Oct 66 13 40 08 3 Auto Swe Oct 65 13 29 22 Oct 65 13 39 08 343 Auto Swe Oct 65 13 10 22 Oct 6 13 20 20 343 Auto Swe Oct 65 13 09 22 Oct 65 13 16 20 33 Auto Sae Oct 65 12 59 22 Oct 65 13 00 29 30 Auto Sawe Oct 65 12 40 22 Oct 65 12 59 29 30 Ato Swe Oct 65 12 39 22 Oct 66 12 40 29 3 Ato Sae Oct 65 12 20 22 Oct 66 12 39 29 30 Ato Swe Oct 65 12 10 22 Oct 66 12 29 29 30 Ato Swe Oct 65 12 09 22 Oct 05 12 10 29 30 Ato Swe Oct 65 11 59 22 Oct 12 00 29 3I Ato Sawe Displaying the Historical Trend for the Data Specified by Memory Summary This operation is carried out on the memory summary screen 1 Move the curso
247. lay returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Keylock e Use Not To enable the keylock function select Use e Password Enter the password for releasing the keylock Set the password using up to 6 alphanumeric characters 9 2 9 2 Disabling Certain Keys Keylock Function e Keylock Items Select Lock to apply the keylock function to the key select Free otherwise START key STOP key MENU key USER key DISP ENTER key AlarmACK AlarmACK soft key Math MathSTART MathSTOP and MathReset soft keys Write memory Soft keys related to memory writing including Message Manual sample Trigger Save Display and Save Event soft keys E mail related soft keys including E Mail START E Mail STOP and E Mail test soft keys see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 Media Prohibit data storage during manual save mode Activating Releasing the Keylock lt Operation Mode gt Procedure Activating the Keylock 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display The Keylock soft key does not appear if the Keylock Use Not setting is Not bot as bos Meza CO A Hath Snap STOP shot Press the Keylock soft key A keylock icon is displayed in the operation status display section
248. le Range or Selections Initial Value First CH 01 to 12 01 Last CH 01 to 12 01 Zone gt Lower 0 to 95 0 Zone gt Upper 5 to 100 100 Graph gt Division 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 or C10 10 Graph gt Bar graph Normal or Center Normal Graph gt Scale position Off or 1 to 6 1 Partial On Off Off Partial gt Expand 1 to 99 50 Partial gt Boundary Minimum span value 1 digit to maximum span value 1 digit for channels set to a range other than scale or square root computation or minimum scale value 1 digit to maximum scale value 1 digit for channels set to scale or square root computation lt 4 View Direction LCD gt Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value View gt Direction gt Trend Horizontal Vertical or Horizon2 Vertical View gt Direction gt Bar graph Horizontal or Vertical Vertical View gt Background White or Black White View gt Trend line 1 2 or 3 dots 2 dots View gt Trip line 1 2 or 3 dots 2 dots View gt Grid Auto 4 div 5 div 6 div 7 div 8 div 9 div 10 div 10 div 11 div or 12 div View gt Scroll time 5s 10s 20s 30s 1 min 5s View gt Scale digit Normal or Fine Normal LCD gt Brightness 1to8 2 LCD gt Saver NotOn Dimmer TimeOff NotOn LCD gt Saver gt Time 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 30 min or 1h th LCD gt Saver gt Restore Key or Key Alm Key Alm lt 5 Math Color gt M1 or PM1 option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value
249. lear the computation data dropout indication Starting the Computation lt Operation Mode gt Procedure Starting the Computations Press the START key When the START key is pressed computation and data acquisition to the internal memory start While computation is in progress a computation icon is displayed in the status display section Computation icon nE gai Ea jA G VO 39 Y g J Iminfdiv e Starting Only the Computations 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Math START soft key A computation icon is displayed in the status display section Math Nath Keylock START reset Snap shot Stopping the Computation lt Operation Mode gt Procedure Stopping the Computations 1 Press the STOP key The following dialog box appears for confirmation 3 1 Tmin dily Memory Cancel 2 Select Mem Math and press the DISP ENTER key When the DISP ENTER key is pressed computation and data acquisition to the internal memory stop 8 5 uondo LINd 10 LIN suoneiado pay uonouny Wodsy pue uoneyndwog eo 8 2 Starting Stopping and Resetting the Computation e Stopping only the computations 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Math STOP soft key Computation stops and the computation icon disappears from the status dis
250. les disables key lock only when key lock is used Log out 9 3 Logs out only when logged in using the key login function Trigger 7 2 Trigger used to start acquiring event data to the internal memory valid only when event data is specified to be acquired to the internal memory and the trigger used to start the acquisition is set to key trigger Math START Math STOP 8 2 Starts stops computation only for models with the computation function M1 PM1 option Math reset 8 2 Resets the computed value of the computation channel to 0 only on models with the computation function M1 PM1 option while the computation is stopped Math ACK 8 2 Recovers the computation dropout indication icon to normal indication only on models with the computation function M1 PM1 option when computation dropout occurs Snapshot 7 5 Saves the screen image data to the external storage medium Log 9 4 3 8 Displays the log screens system information screen Save Display 7 3 Stores the display data to the external storage medium only when the display data is being acquired to the internal memory Save Event 7 3 Stores the event data to the external storage medium only when the event data is being acquired to the internal memory in the free mode internal memory in the free mode FTP test Executes an FTP test E Mail START E Mail STOP Enables disables the e mail transmission function E Mail test Sends test messages to recipient 1 and
251. m the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display First cH B1Last CH ar Range Hode Range Span L Span_U Volt 2v 2 088 2 688 Alarm Type Value Rly No 1 H 6 000 on for o 3 brf 4 off On e Setting the alarm delay time when Type is set T or t MENU key switch to setting mode gt 2 soft key select Tag Moving average or Filter Alarm delay time From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display 33 5 MEMEO 2 Off First cH ol Lest CH ar Tag aaa Hoving average Count Off Alarm delay time Hi Input Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note ____ The Alarm delay time is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key E D 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box suoie1 do dnjyes wiejy pue yndu juswsinseoyy gt 4 2 Setting Alarm Related Parameters Alarm Output Alarm Type First CH Last CH
252. me From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display GROUP 1 Oo Pes 203 09 54 33 MEO First CH 31 Last CH fa TLOG Timer No Emi Sum scale ott Rolling average Off Alarm delay time EM Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The Alarm delay time is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key uondo LINd 10 LIN suoneiado pay uonouny Yodsey pue uoneyndwog eo 8 3 Setting Computation Channel Alarms 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Computation Channel Alarm First CH Last CH Set the target channel for setting the alarm output The target channels are common with the Calculation expression setting Off On Up to 4 alarms can be set to a single channel For each of the alarms 1 to 4 select On to enable an alarm Off to disable it If On is selected Type Value and Relay On Off entry boxes appear Type Select the alarm type conditions for
253. memory also starts the followings e Waveform display on trend screen e Computation function M1 PM1 option The computation icon is displayed in the status display section e Report function M1 PM1 option When starting data acquisition with a trigger activated This explanation applies to event data acquisition in Trigger or Rotate mode When you press the START key this instrument enters the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data acquisition to the internal memory starts To apply a trigger using key operations see the Applying a Trigger Using Key Operations below Applying a Trigger Using Key Operations lt Operation Mode gt When event data is acquired in Trigger or Rotate mode this procedure can be executed when set so that the trigger for starting writing to the internal memory is activated with a key operation Applying a Trigger Using Key Operations During the trigger wait state 1 Press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Trigger soft key Data acquisition to the internal memory starts Trigger Besides the trigger given by the key operation alarm occurrence and remote input R1 PM1 option can be triggers for the data acquisition For the setting procedure related to triggers see section 7 1 7 8 7 2 Starting Stopping the Acquisition to the Internal Memory Note This operation can be assigned to the USER key If it is trigge
254. method is specified manual sample files and report files are split when they exceed 100 KB in size e Ifan error occurs with the CF memory card the error indicator appears on the icon for the external storage medium and the memory end output relay with the F1 option becomes energized To release this condition replace or reformat the memory medium Other Data that Can Be Saved e Setup data Setup data of this instrument can be saved to the root directory of the external storage medium e Screen image data You can save the screen image currently displayed on this instrument s screen as a png format file Destination Directory Name You can specify the name of the save destination directory on the external storage medium up to 8 alphanumeric characters Initial value is DATAO see section 7 1 Display data event data manual sample data TLOG data M1 PM1 option report data M1 PM1 option and screen image data files are saved to this directory File Header You can write a header comment up to 32 alphanumeric characters to display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data M1 PM1 option and report data M1 PM1 option files Saving Data via Ethernet The display data event data report data and screen image data can be automatically transferred to an FTP server via Ethernet for storage Conversely this instrument can operate as an FTP server In this case this instrument is accessed from a PC and
255. meup type is set to Day Week or Month This setting is invalid when Timeup type is set to Hour Set the hour in the range of 00 to 23 FIFO Method for the CF Memory Card Media FIFO The following apply when On is selected The oldest files are deleted to make room to save new files when the external storage medium becomes full This is valid when the external storage medium is a compact flash memory card and auto save is turned ON 7 4 7 1 Setting Measured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Data Save to the External Storage Medium Interval to Save Data in the internal Memory to the External Storage Medium Auto Save Interval lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 3 soft key select Trend Save interval User key From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display i n Time div Imin Auto save interval User key Action Snapshot 18min 2 min 38min ih Next 1 2 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Auto save interval A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor
256. mode The event data in the internal memory is saved automatically to the external storage medium according to the timing shown below For the saving operations see examples of data save operation for display data e Atspecified intervals You ca select an interval data length from 3 minutes to 31 days The selections vary depending on the number of channels of data that is saved and the sampling interval e Specified time You can specify a time to save the data as follows This operation is called data saving through memory timeup Every hour on the hour e Specified hour on the hour every day e Specified hour on the hour on the specified day every week Specified hour on the hour on the specified day every month 1 38 1 5 Data Storage Function e When the acquisition to the memory is stopped When a given key operation is carried out to save data see below e Event data during Trigger mode or Rotate mode e After acquiring the data to the internal memory over the specified period data length e When the acquisition to the memory is stopped The following figure shows the operation when the acquisition area in the internal memory is divided using the trigger mode Data save to the external storage medium __ First block Second block Last block NY Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition uN i N uN Trigger wait Trigger wait Trigger wait
257. mpleted within the scan interval Press the FUNC key then the Math ACK soft key to set the icon back to a white computation icon If computation dropouts occur increase the scan interval or reduce the number of computation channels that are turned on 9 Key lock icon Key icon Key lock is enabled No indication Key lock is disabled For the key lock function see section 1 9 Other Functions 10 E mail transmission function icon Displayed when the e mail transmission function is enabled See the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 11 Alarm icon Displayed when any one of the alarms is occurring The indication varies depending on hold non hold settings of alarm display Non hold Hold Alan ACK Alarm ACK Alarm Occurrence a Release rl alot lt For a description on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 3 Alarm Function 1 4 Display Function Trend Display Displays the waveform of the measured and computed data The direction of the waveform display can be set to horizontal or vertical Trend Vertical GROUP rel Bd g 2G 2 Be g Seale eh ee 1 othe PANA e stil Display update rate Time div 28 E Was T Grid Iminydix Message mark time message al Trip line arty Alarm type Tag channel no f Numerical Unit display section Alarm mark 4 Trend Horizontal Type2 aoe mez 9 i 10 16 10 18
258. mputation channel the number of digits to the right of the decimal of the measured value of the reference channel is matched to that of the difference computation channel and the difference is computed Example If the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 and the measured value of the reference channel is 100 0 the computed result is 10 100 0 90 00 If the units between the reference channel and the computation channel differ unit correction is not performed Example If the measured value of the difference computation channel is 10 00 mV and the measured value of the reference channel is 5 00 mV the computed result is 10 00 V 5 00 mV 5 00 V If the Mode of the reference channel is set to Scale or Sart the scale value is used for the computation When set to Scale Select this mode when scaling the measured value to a value in an appropriate unit for the measurement Select the type input type from Volt TC RTD and DI Then set Range Span Lower Upper as well as Scale Lower Upper and Unit after the conversion The selectable Range is on the soft key menu corresponding to the type input type The selectable range of Span_L and Span_U is that of the specified Range The selectable range of Scale_L and Scale_U is 30000 to 30000 The decimal point position can be set to X XXXX XX XXX XXX XX XXXX X Or XXXXX The decimal point posit
259. n ejecting the external storage medium 3 Floppy disk access lamp llluminates when data is being written or read Rear Panel The terminal blocks and connectors that are installed in the rear panel varies depending on the specification you made at the time of purchase RS 422A 485 serial interface port only when specified 10BASE T Ethernet port only when specified Power terminals Protective ground terminal RS 232 serial interface port only when specified a OVO TEREE amp SCHACH CEHE gt Option terminal block SSSSSSSSS Ses A gt ol gt p gt Measurement input terminal blocks 2 o Circuits for reference junction compensation are built in Do not remove the cover For a description on how to connect the input output signal wires and power supply cables see chapter 2 Installation and Wiring For a description on how to use the communication ports see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 75611 3 2 3 2 Basic Key Operations Switching Operation Modes This instrument has thee operation modes operation mode setting mode and basic setting mode Many of the settings in basic setting mode are prerequisites for the settings Therefore
260. n lead to malfunction Do not apply shock to the instrument When not in use make sure to turn OFF the power If there are any symptoms of trouble such as smoke strange odors or strange sounds coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and disconnect power supply Then contact your nearest dealer or representative Handling Precautions for the External Storage Medium e e Use caution in the handling of the external storage medium as it is delicate Write operations to floppy disks may fail in high temperature or low temperature environments If you are using this instrument in a low temperature environment around 10 C or less use this instrument after the warm up time at least 30 minutes has elapsed If you are using this instrument in a high temperature environment around 40 C or more it is recommended that the external storage medium be inserted into the drive when saving the data and be removed after the data storage operation is finished For the general handling precautions of the external storage medium see the instruction manual that came with that medium CAUTION Do not eject the external storage medium while the access lamp is illuminated This can damage the data e Do not operate the floppy disk drive in a place with vibrations or shock The disk or drive may malfunction Bundi pue uoneyyjeisu m 2 2 Installation Installation Location Install the instrument indoo
261. n the 6 ch and 12 ch model is 2 s the update rate is also 2 s Displayed Information The following Information can be displayed Bar graph base position Center Bar graph base position Normal Information Description Display direction The bar graph can be displayed vertically or horizontally Reference position When the bar graph is displayed horizontally the starting point of the bar reference position can be set to standard Left or right end of the scale whichever the value is smaller or the center Display color The displayed color of bar graphs can be specified for each channel The display color is common to the trend display color Scale display Main scale marks are displayed for each channel This is common with the number of scale divisions of the trend display Alarm Indication The indications of preset alarm marks vary depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication as follows Non hold Alarm Occurrence Release Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK For a description on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 3 Alarm Function 1 21 suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 4 Display Function Overview Display Displays alarm conditions of all channels You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend or bar graph of the group containing the selected channel Cursor white frame NEW 51 eto Eae Channel No
262. ned to 1 and O and used in the equations Enter the data as D01 to D08 the number following the letter D is the remote terminal number in the equations The correlation between the conditions of the remote input signal and the value 1 and 0 are shown below Type of the remote Status 1 or 0 input signal Contact close 1 open 0 Open collector Voltage level is Lo at the remote terminal 1 Voltage level is Hi at the remote terminal 0 e Pulse input D06 to D08 PM1 option You can count pulses using pulse input terminals Enter the data as D06 to D08 the number following the letter D is the pulse input terminal number in the equations You can use D01 to DO5 for pulse inputs as well as D06 to DO8 Unit Handling The unit corresponding to the measured computed data in the equation is not compensated In computations measured and computed data are handled as values without units For example if the measured data from channel 01 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel 02 is 20 V the computed result of 01 02 is 40 How to Write Equations Order of Precedence of the Operators See appendix 2 Meaning and Syntax of Equations Displaying the Computed Result The computed result of computation channels can be displayed on each operation screen e Numerical display The range of displayed values of computed data is from 9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point The decimal point
263. nformation about communication functions see the communications interface user s manual 9499 040 7561 1 4 11 suoljeiodo dnjyes wiejy pue yndu juowsinseoyy a 4 3 Setting Pulse Input PM1 Option Explains how to count the pulses input to the dedicated pulse input terminal and how to enter settings to display the number of pulses per the unit time and the pulse sum value Pulse Input Terminal lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 9 soft key select Option gt 1 soft key select Remote pulse From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Node Remote Pulse No Action il None 2 None 3 None 4 None 5 None 6 7 Puse 8 Pulse None Memory Trigger AlarmACK Next 1 6 Setup Procedure Carry out the following operation when Pulse is not set to Action box of the pulse input terminal you are going to use The initial value for Action of terminal numbers 6 to 8 are Pulse 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Action of number 6 7 or 8 A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to Pulse The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Press
264. ng is indicated in red FI 103 Area of channels on which an H 316 5 m3 h alarm is not occurring is indicated in green Hold Non Hold of the Alarm Indicator There are two methods in displaying alarms The initial value is non hold e Clears the alarm display when the cause of the alarm is no longer met non hold e Holds the alarm display until the alarm ACK operation is executed hold The initial value is set to non hold 1 3 Alarm Function Alarm Output Relay A1 A2 or A3 option If you are using a model with the optional alarm output relay a contact signal can be generated according to the alarm conditions The number of contact outputs for a A1 to A3 are 2 4 and 6 respectively The alarm output relays are indicated using 101 to 106 in the alarm output settings The following functions can be specified on the alarm output relay Reflash When multiple alarms are set to one alarm output relay this function notifies the succeeding alarms after the first alarm that causes the relay activation When a succeeding alarm occurs the output relay temporarily turns OFF approximately 500 ms The initial value is set to Off do not use The reflash alarm function is set only to output relays 101 102 and 103 101 and 102 for A1 option Alarm status Alarm relay status reflash on Alarm relay status reflash off Note CI assuming 101 is assigned Channel 1 assuming 101 is assigned Channel
265. not installed 353 This command cannot be specified in the current setting 354 This command is not available during sampling or calculating 10 6 10 1 A List of Messages e Memory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output Communication Command Execution An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 360 Output interface must be chosen from Ethernet or RS by using XO command 361 Memory data has not been saved to the communication output buffer 362 There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND 363 All data have already been transferred e Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 390 Command error 391 Delimiter error 392 Parameter error 393 No permission 394 No such connection 395 Use quit to close this connection 396 Failed to disconnect 397 No TCP control block e Other Communication Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 400 Input username 401 Input password 402 Select username from admin or user 403 Login incorrect try again 404 No more login at the specified level is a
266. nput Trigger 250 ms or more Releases the alarm indication and relay output option of all alarms This is the same function as when the AlarmACK soft key is pressed This procedure is not valid if the alarm display output relay operation is set to non hold e Adjusting the internal clock Time adj Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more Adjusts the internal clock of this instrument to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied Time of signal input New time 00 min 00 s to 01 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 01 min 50s becomes 10 hr 00 min 00s 02 min 00 s to 57 min 59 s Time is unchanged 58 min 00 s to 59 min 59 s Adjusts the internal clock down to the nearest hour Example 10 hr 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hr 00 min 00 s e Staris stops computation Math M1 PM1 option Remote input Edge Rising start falling stop Starts stops the computation This is valid only on models with the computation function If the computation is started applying a rising signal produces no effect If the computation is stopped applying a falling signal produces no effect 1 52 1 8 Remote Conirol Function R1 PM1 Option e Clears computed results Math rst M1 PM1 option e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Resets the data on all computation channels This is valid only on models with the computation function and while
267. ntervals Channel Number or Tag Name Display The channels can be displayed as channel number or tags The setting applies to all channels Alarm Indication Alarms are checked at all times and displayed on the relevant screens using alarm type symbols Name Symbol Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Difference upper limit alarm Difference lower limit alarm Upper limit on rate of change alarm Lower limit on rate of change alarm Delay upper limit alarm Delay lower limit alarm eae Ei a 9 ee ae ol suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 4 Display Function Status Indication Section The following information is displayed in the status display section during operation mode and setting mode The information is not displayed during basic setting mode Setup Mode is displayed instead Display data o n Event data Free mode E E Eg O Event data Trigger or Rotate mode a The internal memory is A divided into 16 blocks B E c 1 User name The user name is displayed when the key login function is used and the user is logged in 2 Group name or display name The display name or group name corresponding to the display shown on the data display section ALL is displayed only when all channels are displayed on the trend display see page 1 17 3 Current date and time The current date and time are displayed 4 Data acquisition to the internal memory ON OFF A and B is alte
268. nting on a vertical plane Tilt Mounting may be inclined backward up to 30 degrees from a horizontal plane Allowable panel thickness Material Case color Front panel Dimensions Weight 2 to 26 mm Case drawn steel Bezel polycarbonate Case Grayish blue green Munsell 2 0B 5 0 1 7 or equivalent Bezel Charcoal grey light Munsell 10B 3 6 0 3 or equivalent Water and dust proof based on IEC529 IP65 144 W x 144 H x 234 D mm Models without storage drive approx 2 2 kg Models with FDD approx 2 5 kg Models with CF memory card slot approx 2 3 kg Normal Operating Conditions Item Specifications Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Power supply voltage Power supply frequency Vibration Shock Magnetic field Noise Mounting position Warm up time Altitude Measurement category Installation category Pollution degree 0 to 50 C when using FDD 0 to 40 C 20 to 80 RH at 0 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH at 40 to 50 C 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC 50 Hz 2 60 Hz 2 10 to 60 Hz 0 2 m s or less Not acceptable 400 A m or less DC and 50 60 Hz Normal mode 50 60 Hz Volt The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring range DI level The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring range TC The peak value including the signal must be less than 1 2 times the measuring thermal electromotive force RTD The peak value must
269. o the file list section 3 Use the up and down arrow keys to select the file to be loaded To move the blue cursor back to the Directory name column press the left arrow key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key Waveforms are displayed on the historical trend display To return to the Save Load Clear data menu screen without displaying the historical trend press the ESC key Note The display data extension is dds the event data extension is dev 7 16 7 7 Managing Files and Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium This section explains how to check the files and the free space on the external storage medium how to delete files and directories and how to format the external storage medium Deleting files and directories and formatting external storage media can be carried out in either setting mode or basic setting mode Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium Deleting Files and Directories Formatting the Medium lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Operation Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following display After carrying out the steps above select the one of the following soft keys according to your needs e Checking files and free space 6 soft key select File list The following display appears GROUP 1 m 5 0ct 05 2003 09 50 30 APIP File list Directory File name
270. o uoneuejdxg 1 5 Data Storage Function Pretrigger for the Event Data Pretrigger is applied to the event data with Trigger or Rotate modes You can have event data before the trigger point be stored Itis specified in terms of a percentage of the data length 0 5 25 50 75 95 100 If 0 is selected all data are after the trigger point The initial setting is 0 Trigger Type for the Event Data When Trigger or Rotate is selected the trigger type is selected by turning each type of trigger ON OFF The triggers operate in an OR fashion the trigger is activated when any of the conditions that are turned ON are satisfied Type Description Key trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when the FUNC key gt Trigger soft key or the USER key only when the trigger function is assigned to the USER key is pressed Externaltrigger The trigger condition is satisfied when the external contact specified by remote control function is turned ON Alarm trigger The trigger condition is satisfied when any of the alarms occur Estimate of the Number of Data That Can Be Written to the Internal Memory and the Time Required to Do So See appendix 1 Time Estimate for Writing Display Event Data to the Internal Memory 1 34 1 5 Data Storage Function Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory Other Data Manual Sampled Data Every time a given key operation is carried out all measured computed data
271. ode In this case the settings remain unchanged Selecting Cancel and pressing the DISP ENTER key returns you to basic setting mode menu In this case the on going setting changes are held Entering Values A value must be entered when setting items such as the date time and span lower upper limit In such cases a numeric entry pop up window appears as shown in the following figure Follow the procedures below to enter the value Procedure Operation Keys o gt o o N Entering Values 1 Use the left and right arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the position you wish to enter a value 2 Use the up and down arrow keys to select a value you wish to enter on the number keypad The selected number is displayed at the cursor position 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all digits you wish to change 4 Press the DISP ENTER key The numeric entry pop up window disappears and the value is set To cancel the settings and clear the numeric entry pop up window press the ESC key Cursor blue Select the input position using the left and right arrow keys 0c ia 003 89 20 oo BO me 0 Numeric entry pop up window Number keypad Select the input number using the up and down arrow keys 3 8 3 2 Basic Key Operations Entering Characters Characters must be entered when setting items such as tag names and messages In such cases a character entry pop up window appears as shown in the
272. of 0 00 to 23 00 at 1 hour steps e Reset Set whether to reset the TLOG computation value at every interval On or Off e Action See Data Save at Intervals Specified by the Timer below Data Save at Intervals Specified by the Timer e Action If set to DataSave the instantaneous values of all measurement computation channels are written to the internal memory at every interval This data is called TLOG data Select Off to disable this function Note e TLOG data is acquired from the time the computation is started till the computation is stopped e When storing the data to the external storage medium the data is stored to the TLOG data file dtg extension Selecting the Timer Sum Scale lt Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 11 soft key select Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display mor 3 09 54 51 Aw Tag TLOG Timer No Sum scale off Rolling average Off Alarm delay time 10 s il 2 3 Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 8 4 Setting the Timer for Statistical Computations TLOG Computation and Data Save TLOG Data 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you chang
273. on Manual sampled data The first time manual sample is executed a manual sampled data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file for each successive manual sample operation Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when manual sample is executed all unsaved data are saved the first time when manual sample is executed after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive TLOG data M1 PM1 option The first time TLOG data is acquired a TLOG data file is created on the external storage medium The data are appended to this file at each time interval When the number of TLOG data sets exceeds 400 a new file is created Note When auto save is selected and there is no medium in the drive at the time when data are supposed to be saved all unsaved data are saved the first time when the interval time expires after the storage medium is reinserted into the drive Report data M1 PM1 option The first time report data is created a report data file is created on the external storage medium A file is created for each type of report such as hourly daily weekly and monthly reports The data are appended to this file at each time interval Dividing report files The report files are divided at the following times e When data acquisition is stopped For hourly reports e When the 0 00 report is created every day e When the number of data sets in th
274. on compensation Recorder External reference junction compensation Maintain the junction between the thermocouple and the copper wire at To C Copper wire Thermocouple 1 5 suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 2 Functions of the Input Section Moving average value Integration Time of the A D Converter Filter Moving Average The filter and moving average are used to suppress the effects of noise that is riding on the signal Filtering is provided on the 3 ch model Moving average is provided on the 6 ch and 12 ch model The filter or moving average can be set on each channel Filter Function 3 ch model Suppresses the effects of noise above the frequency determined by the specified time constant The time constant can be set to 2 s 5 s or 10 s Effects of using filter Output response for a step input Sone 63 2 of the output value I Output response curve when using the filter 2 5 10s time constant the time it takes to reach 63 2 of the output value Moving Average The input signal of the measurement channel is set to the averaged value of the m most current data points the number of moving averaged data points acquired at the scan interval The number of moving averaged data points can be set in the range 2 to 16 The figure below shows an example indicating the operation of the buffer for the moving average computation when the number of moving averaged data points is set to 5
275. only hourly Number of Measurement and Computation Channels That Can Be Assigned to the Report Up to 12 channels can be assigned to one report The report data are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off About the Sum Scale In the sum computation data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min h or day a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m 3 min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the sum unit is set to min then 2 s 60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving aresultthathasam min unit The following equations are applied The scan interval unit is in seconds Off measured value S measured value x scan interval min gt measured value x scan interval 60 h measured value x scan interval 3600 day gt measured value x scan interval 86400 1 47 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option If Power is Lost While the Report Function is in Progress Ifa p
276. operation screens Also you can output relay signals from the alarm output terminal on the option terminal block A1 A2 A3 options The overview display allows you to check the alarm status on all channels Also the alarm summary shows detailed information about the alarms in the order that they occurred Overview Display Example Alarm Summary Display Example Alarm occurrence channel channel No or tag Area of channels on which an alarmis occurring is indicated in red Area of channels on which an alarm is not occurring is indicated in green 196 1 C Alarm No type Date and time when the alarm occurred Date and time when the alarm was released TI iAi suoloun jo uoneueldxy a 1 1 Overview of the Paperless Recorder Saving Data The measured data is acquired to the internal memory The data in the internal memory can also be saved to external storage media such as floppy disks 2HD and compact flash memory cards on models with a drive Recorder External Storage Medium lt j j gt CF memory card The data that has been saved to an external storage medium can be displayed on a PC using the software that comes with the package The data can also be loaded into this instrument to be displayed Communication Function You can carry out the following types of operations by using the optional communication functions C7 C2 C3 e Operatethis instrument e Conf
277. or tag name T I G1 Alarm type H 196 1 C Area of channels on which an alarm is occurring is indicated in red FI 103 Area of channels on which an H 316 5 m3 h alarm is not occurring is 5 indicated in green Updating the Numerical Display Numerical display is updated every second However when the scan interval on the 6 ch and 12 ch model is 2 s the update rate is also 2 s Alarm Indication The display in the channel display area and channel no tag name when an alarm occurs on any of the channels varies depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication as follows Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Alarm Occurrence Release For a description on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 3 Alarm Function 1 22 1 4 Display Function Alarm Summary A list of the most recent alarms can be displayed Up to 120 incidents can be displayed By selecting an alarm from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the alarm can be recalled Number of the alarm information displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the alarm information in the internal memory Tag Channel no Alarm No 1 2 3 4 Type H L h I R r T t Date amp Time alarm occurred Date amp Time alarm was released SLARM UMHAR om FF wi 3 soon Eea a025 Channel Te Alam IN Time Alam OUT Time TI 101 4L Oc
278. ote Computation data dropout occurs when the computation process cannot be completed within the scan interval If computation dropout occurs frequently lessen the load on the CPU by reducing the number of computation channels or setting a longer scan interval When computation data is written to the internal memory the data immediately before the computation dropout is substituted as the computation data of the scan interval when dropout occurred 8 6 8 3 Setting Computation Channel Alarms Like measurement channels alarms can be output based on the values of the computation channels This section explains how to set the alarms Note Set the alarm after setting the equation When computation is turned On Off or when equations and span settings are changed the alarm setting for that channel is turned Off Computation Channel Alarms lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display e Setting the alarm MENU key switch to setting mode gt 9 soft key select Math set1 Expression Alarm From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display pet hs 200 o9 54 20 00901 METIS First CH 31 Last cH a1 Hath 0n Calculation expression l Span Lower Span_Upper Unit 200 08 200 00 Alarm Type Value Rly No E n oaa on fior e Setting the alarm delay time MENU key switch to setting mode gt 11 soft key select Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay ti
279. out a given key operation see page 7 11 a message Do you want to save measured data appears Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key to save the data In manual save mode set how the data is to be saved Unsave save only the data that has not been saved or All save all the data at File DST setting display gt Save data see page 7 6 Auto By having the external storage medium inserted in the drive at all times data save operation is automatically carried out at specified intervals This action is called auto save When auto saving the display data set the auto save interval by choosing 3 Trend Save interval User key gt Auto save interval see page 7 5 for instructions Data Select the type of data to be acquired to the internal memory from Display display data only E D display data and event data and Event event data only Event only when Data is set to E D or Event Sample rate Select the interval used to save the event data from the following 3 ch model 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 300s and 600s 6 ch model 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 300s and 600s 12 ch model 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 300s and 600s Mode Select the mode from Free Trigger and Rotate Free appears as a choice only when Data is set to Event e When Save is set to Auto and you select Free the Data length box is displayed 7 1 Setting Mea
280. out detection Common mode rejection ratio 120 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 500 Q imbalance between the minus terminal and ground Normal mode rejection ratio 40 dB 50 60 Hz 0 1 Noise reduction method Reduced by integral type A D converter and low pass filter Maximum common mode voltage 60 V DC under measurement category I However maximum common mode voltage that meets the rejection ratio is 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Maximum common mode voltage between channels 250 Vrms AC 50 60 Hz Parallel capacitance for RTD input 0 01uF or less Measurement input terminal Cramped input terminal Terminal blocks are removable Wire gauge 0 2 2 5 mm AWG24 AWG17 Effects of Operating Conditions Item Specifications Ambient temperature With temperature variation of 10 C 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less for Volt ranges 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less for TC ranges Excluding the error of reference junction compensation 0 1 of rdg 2 digit or less for RTD ranges Power supply Except for P1 model With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 90 to 132 VAC 180 to 250 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less P1 model With variation within 21 6 to 26 4 VDC AC 50 60 Hz 1 digit or less With variation of 2 Hz from rated power frequency at 24 VAC 0 1 of rdg 1 digit or less Magnetic field AC 50 60 Hz and DC 400 A m fields 0 1 of rdg 10 dig
281. ow the alarm value at X4 and the alarm is released Note The following special operations are available for the delay upper lower limit alarm e When a delay alarm is set on a computation channel M1 PM1 option and the computation is stopped If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting the alarm is turned ON after the specified period delay period elapses Computation stopped Alarm value Computed data Alarm turns ON e Delay alarm when a power failure occurs Alarm detection is reset upon a power failure It restarts the operation after the power recovers Measured computed data Alarm value Alarm Off _On Off On Off p ower failure Power failure occurence recovery occurence recovery e Operation when the alarm setting is changed When anew delay alarm is set The alarm detection starts at the time the alarm is set It is unaffected by the conditions existing before the alarm is set e lf the alarm setting of a preexisting delay alarm is changed If an alarm is not occurring at the time of the change alarm detection starts at the new setting Ifan alarm is occurring at the time of the change and the alarm type is set to delay upper limit alarm the alarm continues as long as the input is above or equal to the new setting If the input is below the new setting the alarm turns OFF If the alarm type is set to delay lower l
282. ower disruption occurred while the report function was in progress the report function will resume after the power is restored The exact operation will vary depending on whether the power is restored before or after the scheduled time to create a report Time of Recovery Report Operation After the time to create the report Report data are created immediately after power is restored The measured computed data up to the time of the power disruption are used For the next scheduled report data after the power recovery are used Before the time to create the report After power is restored report data are created at the time of the next normally scheduled report All measured computed data excluding the power disruption period are used How the Measured Computed Data Are Handled When There is an Abnormality in the Data Type of Abnormal Data Report Data Average value Max Min value Sum value Positive over not used used not used Negative over not used used not used Error not used not used not used Burnout Positive over range not used used not used Burnout Negative over range not used used not used Displaying the Report over range for measurement channels or computation overflow for computation channels The reports can be displayed using the key operations Fora displayed example see page 1 25 e Status Display If the data of ameasurement or a computation channel
283. p Data and Clearing the Internal Memory ss sssessessesseeereereereeeeeenen 3 14 3 6 Changing the Displayed Language cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeeeaeeeneeeeieeenaees 3 15 3 7 Changing the Time Zone wiasniicsdneinnieciii nna Wien S E E SE 3 16 3 8 Confirming the System Configuration Firmware Version Number and MAC Address of This INStrUMent ceeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaeesieeeeaeeeneeeens 3 17 3 9 Inserting and Ejecting the External Storage Medium ceeceeeceeeteeeeeeeeeeteaeeeeeerentens 3 18 Measurement Input and Alarm Setup Operations 4 1 Setting Parameters Related to Measurement Inputs cc ceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 4 1 4 2 Setting Alarm Related Parameters cceseceesceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeceaeeseeeeeaeesaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeege 4 7 4 3 Setting Pulse Input PM1 Option ce eeeecceceeeeee cent eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 4 12 Operations on the Operation Screens 5 1 Displaying Measured Data in Waveform Numerical Values or Bar Graph Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens siririna ee a a e a a inao E asi ieai 5 1 5 2 Displaying All Channels on a Screen Overview Screen sesssessesssrersersrrerrerrersrrereere 5 4 5 3 Displaying Information List Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory SUMMARY irssi neni een ee edieihaec Eaa 5 5 5 4 Displaying Measured Data Previously Acquired Historical Trend ecer 5 8
284. pOMt data ic vec cde Auerenewad ranean 1 28 1 36 5 7 report file data format csiis App 16 report function Report set reset action TEOG senenin aaa reset count pulse resetting the computations FROSIONC sc cctesseticss ste aitesenass RI occ cees ce chase crested cnaacnchaeaceoesuaseczs os x encerutecaeeeeaense2s rolling average te FOUALC iridia arei eTA E ETE NEESS S Sampl Trate ssnin a 7 2 sampling interval display data 0 eee eee 1 30 sampling interval event data eee eeeeee 1 30 sampling length ee App 2 SIVO e EE E REE 7 2 SaVe data EE atienevavestmemaeeees 7 7 SAV OM escapist evazvevehcssceusssve ni ce R IE A O E E 3 13 Saving data auto SAVE cccssecsccavceeceaceecseeveressavestensetedsredss 7 10 saving data FUNC key 7 10 saving data manual save ee cd Ie saving data collectively wel saving data via Ethernet 00 00 cece eee eeeeeeeeeee 1 41 SAVING SCLUP Cala ssectaccssceccreevartasseeebevearenveitesceasteaniseweateeys 7 21 Saving the USer name 15 n ived a nti iver ences 9 7 SCAl6 aniran scale se ias SCA CGI E E TT SCAIS IS play ccs aseene ersa ENEA Scale position 7 Scam internal sosai ne bevedavavdeneewetes Scan MENA annaua aeaa Scroll time scroll time assesses selecting the timer sisisi niasa SOUMING MODS cccesces sseccsccecececsiseascuvsstsacercateneeteatenvevertecreveavdeces 3 3 SNUNUE
285. ped For the operating procedure see section 7 2 e On models with the computation function option M1 PM1 this key is also used to start stop the computation and report USER Key Executes the function assigned to it For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 9 1 Key Operations in Basic Setting and Setting Modes See appendix 6 Settings for more about setting mode and basic setting mode Operation Keys Selecting Setup Items on the Menu When this instrument enters setting mode a setting menu appears as shown in the figure below In this menu select the items you wish to set by pressing the soft keys To close this menu press the ESC key Set mode at Range Alarm Tag Moving average Alarm delay time R Trend Save interval User key Hessage 1 2 3 4 Selecting Setup Items on the Setting Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the appropriate item box The soft keys corresponding to the item are displayed at the bottom section of Time div Auto save interval lh User key Action Snapshot Imin 2min Smin 14min Next 1 3 3 6 3 2 Basic Key Operations 2 Select the item using the soft key The box for the item you entered turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next Time div Auto save interval 1h User key Action Snapshot 18min 26min 38min ih Next 1 3 To cancel the settings press the ESC key On the cancel confi
286. play section Note e When the computation is stopped the computed data of the computation channel is held at the value that existed immediately before If data is being acquired to the internal memory the value held is written e This operation can be assigned to the USER key For the Procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 9 1 i Kop 1 6 50 TENE ERA Keylock STOP Snap shot B Resetting the Computations lt Operation Mode gt You can carry out this operation only when the computation is stopped Resetting the Computations 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Math reset soft key The data of all computation channels is reset to 0 Hath Math reset Keylock START Note This operation can be assigned to the USER key For the Procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 9 1 Clearing the Computation Dropout Indication lt Operation Mode gt This operation can be carried out only when the computation data dropout occurred Clearing the Computation Dropout Indication 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Math ACK soft key Math ACK appears on the soft key menu only when a computation data dropout occurs the computation icon turns yellow When cleared the computation icon returns to a white color N
287. playing Partially Expanded Waveforms sseesseeseeessressieesireeriissinsrirnerireerrensrnssrnne 6 21 Data Save Load Operations 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 Setting Measured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Data Save to the External Storage MedqiUM wists ia ete nied ass a E ri E o e aad 7 1 Starting Stopping the Acquisition to the Internal Memory ccceessceeeeseeeeseeeesteeeeeees 7 8 Saving Data to the External Storage Medium Only for Models with an External Storage Medium Drive ceecceeeceeeteeeeeeeteeeeeeees 7 10 Saving Measured Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sample cecceeceeeteeseeeeeeenees 7 14 Saving the Screen Image Data SnapShot e eeceeeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeaees 7 15 Loading the Measured Data on the External Storage Medium Historical Trend 7 16 Managing Files and Checking the Free Space on the External Storage Medium 7 17 Clearing the Data in the Internal Memory eecceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeetaaes 7 20 Saving and Loading Setup Data cca cece eniaalia innit a eia 7 21 Computation and Report Function Related Operations M or PM Option 8 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags 8 1 8 2 Starting Stopping and Resetting the Computation eceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteneeteeeeeneeaes 8 5 8 3 Setting Computation Channel Alarms
288. ports lt Basic Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 9 soft key select Option gt 2 soft key select Report Report Report set Ave Inst Ave Date 1 Time lt hour C eo Report CH Ral On Off on Channel 81 Sum scale fs Off Hour DET H D Next 1 2 Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note ______ The Date or Day of the week and Time are set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed 8 14 8 6 Creating Reports Setting the Report Function Report set Select the
289. r can be activated simply by pressing a single key For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 9 1 Stopping the Acquisition to the Internal Memory lt Operation Mode gt Procedure 1 Press the STOP key 2 Use the left and right arrow keys to select Memory or Mem Math in the confirmation window that appears ET tl D Tmin dily Memory Cancel Select Mem Math if you wish to not only stop the acquisition to the internal memory but also the computation assigned to computation channels If the model does not have the optional computation function M1 PM1 a confirmation message Do you want to stop storage appears Select Yes 3 Press the DISP ENTER key When data acquisition to the internal memory stops the internal memory icon changes from run indication to stop indication Internal memory icon y p ae i nv iv Actions That Stops at the Same Time The start operation of the acquisition to the internal memory also stops the followings Updating waveform display on trend screen e Computation function M1 PM1 option only when you select Mem Math in the operation above The computation icon is displayed in the status display section e Report function M1 PM1 option Note When you stop the acquisition to the internal memory data is saved to the external storage medium If the external storage medium is not inserted at this point an error
290. r of Pulses per Second Calculates number of pulses per second using pulses input through the terminal 6 on the 3 ch model scan interval 250 ms Moving avarege over a second Pulse input Ibn fer e LN Time Scan interval 250 ms Ch 31 gt Number of pulses 4 times per scan interval Ch 32 E iE Ej E Ej E Number of pulses per second Computation equation Assigne computation channels as follows Set computation equations for each channel Upper lower limit of span is set according to the application Note In a single measurement interval calculation is performed on numbered channels in the order from smallest to largest For channels that calculate the number of pulses per second use higher numbered channels than those of the channels that count the number of pulses at each scan interval Channel Equation Description 31 D6 Counts the number of pulses every scan interval 32 31 K01 Number of pulses per second Constant Description K01 Counts the number of pulses every scan interval Channel 31 Equation D6 Counts the number of pulses every scan interval 250 ms Rolling average Takes the moving average over a period of 1 second This value multiplied by 4 1 s 250 ms counts the number of pulses per second e Interval 250 ms e Number of samples 4 Channel 32 Equation 31 K0
291. r of pulses The pulses input through the terminal 6 is summed and displayed Paise Toput Jct lll Time Scan interval Ch 31 gt per scan interval Sum _ a Ch 33 a ia Pulse sum value Computation equation Assign computation channels as follows Set computation equations for each channel Upper lower limit of span is set according to the application Note In a single measurement interval calculation is performed on numbered channels in the order from smallest to largest For channels that calculate sum values use higher numbered channels than those of the channels that count the number of pulses at each scan interval Channel Equation Description 31 D6 Counts the number of pulses every scan interval 33 TLOG SUM 31 Pulse sum value Channel 31 Equation D6 D6 indicates the counting of pulses on pulse input terminal 6 The number of pulses per scan interval is counted and displayed Channel 33 Equation TLOG SUM 31 The sum value of the pulses counted on channel 31 is calculated using the TLOG SUM function and displayed See page 1 44 for information about TLOG SUM 4 13 suoljei0do dnjes wiejy pue yndu juswsinseoyy gt 4 3 Setting Pulse Input PM1 Option Application Example 2 Numbe
292. r range including Burnout 99999 minimum value e Negative over range including Burnout 99999 instantaneous value SUM e When all data are measurement errors or over range Blank Sum value When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e Computation channel Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Displayed value AVE When all data are computation errors or over range Blank Average value MAX MIN INST When all data are computation errors Blank Maximum value When the maximum value exceeds 99999999 999999999 minimum value e When the minimum value is below 9999999 99999999 instantaneous value SUM e When all data are computation errors or Blank Sum value computation overflow e When the sum value exceeds 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 e When the sum value is below 3 4E 38 9 999999E 99 The decimal position that was specified when the span for the channel was specified is reflected in the maximum and minimum values For example if the span setting of the channel is 200 0 then 99999999 is output when the value exceeds 99999999 9 and 99999999 is output when the value is below 999999 9 Storing to the Internal Memory and Saving to the External Storage Medium For a description on data storage function see section1 5 1 49 suoloun jo uoneueldxy
293. r the event data select Trigger or Rotate for the mode Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisition and the time period during which to acquire the data event data file size Example 3 Continuously record detailed data Select even data only Select Free for the mode Example 4 Recording is not necessary under normal circumstances Only record detailed data around the alarm incident Select event data only Select Trigger or Rotate for the mode Specify the trigger used to start the event data acquisition and the time period during which to acquire the data 1 31 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 5 Data Storage Function Acquiring Data to the Internal Memory Display Data and Event Data Combination of Data Types to Be Acquired Select display data only display data and event data or event data only Internal Memory Capacity The capacity of the internal memory for acquiring display data and event data is 1 2 MB When the measured computed data are saved as both display data and event data 0 9 MB is used to save display data and 0 3 MB is used to save event data Recorder Internal memory Display data only Event data only Display data and event data 1 2MB 1 2MB 0 9MB oe Display data Event data Channels for Saving the Display Data Event Data You can specify the channels to save the display data or event data from the measurement
294. r using the up and down arrow keys and select the data i os maa SE i fi Erd Time Oct 65 08 14 40 Oct 66 08 16 02 42 Saplings Cursor p oct 6 08 04 40 Oct 65 06 14 38 Auto Save Oct 65 07 54 40 Oct 65 08 04 38 3 Auto Swe Oct 65 07 48 20 Oct 66 07 54 30 1 Stor Oct 05 07 47 12 Oct 66 07 47 40 15 Stoe Oct 05 07 45 50 Oct 66 07 46 16 14 Stor 2 Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in Changing the Display 5 6 5 3 Displaying Information List Alarm Summary Message Summary and Memory Summary Displaying the Report Data This operation is carried out on the memory summary screen Display the report data according to the procedure described in Changing the Display REPORT DATA Oct 85 pg a Index 4 4 Kind Hourly Start Oct 5 2083 07 54 38 Timeup Oct 5 2083 08 00 00 ChUnit Sts Ave Hax Hin Sum a 46 7 205 0 105 2 1 55910E 04 gy 0 022 1 000 1 001 7 17a B Bh 25 1 318 2 190 8 8 17603E 44 4 5 0 5 0 5 0 1 61 ot 342 5 360 1 3235 7 1 10355 6 kPa 185 12 188 91 181 48 5 979215404 e Switching the Displayed Report Data The Index of the report data display shows the number of the report data being displayed the number of report data saved to the internal memory The largest report data number corresponds to the most recent report data Press the arrow keys while displaying the report data to switch the report data
295. rage of the computed results Rolling Average lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 11 soft key select Math set3 Tag TLOG Rolling average Alarm delay time From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display lt gt agi ct 05 2003 89 55 06 waa First CH 31 Last cH a1 Tag TLOG Timer No 1 Sum scale Off Rolling average on E Interval 10s Number of samples 1 Alarm delay time 10 s On Off Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note ___ The Number of samples is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Rolling Average e First CH Last CH Set the target channel for setting the alarm output The target channels also apply to Tag TLOG and Alarm delay time settings e Rolling average To take the moving average of the measured results select
296. range occurs For thermocouple or RTD input over range occurs when the measured value exceeds approximately 10 C of the measurable range For example the measurable range when the measurement range is R is 0 0 to 1760 0 C If the measured value exceeds approximately 1770 0 C over range occurs if the measured value falls below approximately 10 0 C over range occurs e Numerical display of computation channels common to trend digital and bar graph displays See section 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option Alarm Indication The indications of preset alarm marks vary depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication as follows Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK ee deN a Alarm For a description on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 3 Alarm Function 1 20 1 4 Display Function Bar Graph Display The measured computed data are displayed using bar graphs Bar Graph Horizontal ea lt tel e TI 181 ouT e2 F 183 VA 284 TI 205 ono ae aa 10 0 1208 8 Bar Graph Vertical Center Left end Tag channel no PI 206 a ah Alarm mark 28 8 Upper limit of span Scale Alarm point mark Bar graph Le Lower limit of span eg Unit 188 56 Measured value Updating of the Numerical Display Numerical display is updated every second However when the scan interval o
297. ring only Operator page Switches the screen from the browser Modify and write messages Access control Controls access on each screen using user name and password FTP client Automatically transfers files to a FTP server Files can be transported Display data file event data file screen image data file report data file FTP server File output on request by host computer directory operation and file delete on the external storage medium Setting measurement server Uses our private protocol Maintenance test server Outputs connection information network information Instrument information server Outputs serial number and model type of this instrument Login function Controls access to setting measurement server maintenance test server and FTP server User level number Administrator 1 User 6 FAIL Memory End Output F1 Item Specifications FAIL The relay contact output on the rear panel informs of the occurrence of a system error Relay action De energized when CPU fails Memory end Another relay contact output informs of the time until end of the internal memory space selectable from 1 2 5 10 20 50 or 100 hours before the data is overwritten during manual save mode and auto save mode or of the time when the remaining space on the external storage medium reaches to 10 of whole capacity during auto save mode Relay action Energized on memory end Contact specification 250 VAC 50 60 Hz 3 A 250 VDC
298. rmACK AlarmACK Releases the alarm indication and relay output option This is the same function as when the AlarmACK soft key is pressed Time Adjust Time adj Adjusts the internal clock of this instrument to the nearest hour depending on the time when the remote signal is applied MathStart Stop Math M1 PM1 option Starts stops the computation ManualSample M sample Write measured data of all channels to the internal memory once PaneliLoad Pnl1 load Panel2Load Pnl2 load Panel3Load Pnl3 load only on models with the storage medium drive Loads the setup data file named LOAD1 PNL LOAD2 PNL or LOAD3 PNL stored on the external storage medium and activates the settings Message1 Message1 to Message8 Message8 Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend screen The displayed message is also written to the internal memory Snapshot Snapshot Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium Snapshots can be taken in any mode operation mode setting mode or basic setting mode This function is available on the models with an external storage drive or models with the Ethernet communication interface C7 option that are set up for snapshot FTP transfer Pulse Pulse PM1 option You can use the remote input terminals as the pulse input terminals For the description of the pulse input see section 4 3 9 12 Chapter 10 T
299. rmation window that appears press the DISP ENTER key with Yes is selected Time div Auto save interval Do you really want to cancel this setting vs E Note If values or characters need to be entered the soft key menu displays Input For the procedure in entering values and characters see pages 3 8 and 3 9 Confirming Settings on the Setting Displays Press the DISP ENTER key The item you entered is confirmed and the item box turns white again The cursor moves to the first item box on the setting display Switching from Setting Mode to Operation Mode Display setting menu and press the ESC key Switching from Basic Setting Mode to Operation Mode and Saving the Basic Settings Display basic setting menu and then carry out the following procedures 1 Press the End soft key A confirmation window containing the message Do you want to store and make Setup Mode Basic setting mode Basic setting mode a Option es Option Ge Communication Do you want to store and make the new settings take effect nn Web E Hail end en ves E 9 16 11 End Next 3 3 3 7 suoneiado uowwog pue sapoy Aejdsiq Sued jo soweN eo 3 2 Basic Key Operations 2 Press the DISP ENTER key with Yes is selected The settings are saved and this instrument returns to operation mode If you select No and press the DISP ENTER key the settings are not saved and this instrument returns to operation m
300. rmed using e1 and e2 which are identified as either zero or non zero The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs logical computation on a computing element AND Logical product Syntax e1 ANDe2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are non 0 the operation results in 1 otherwise in g Status e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1ANDe2 1 App 8 Appendix 2 Meaning and Syntax of Equations OR Logical sum Syntax e1ORe2 Condition If both e1 and e2 are 0 the operation results in 0 otherwise in 1 Status e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e10Re2 1 XOR Mutually exclusive logical sum Syntax e1XORe2 Condition If e1 and e2 have different values the operation results in 1 otherwise in 0 Status e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 0 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 1 e1 0 e2 0 e1XORe2 0 NOT Logical negation Syntax NOTe1 Condition Reverses the value of data e1 Status e1 0 NOTe1 1 e1 0 NOTe1 0 EXAMPLE 01 020R03 GT 04 Determines the OR of the computed results of 01 02 and 03 GT 04 App 9 xipueddy 3 Appendix 2 Meaning and Syntax of Equat
301. rnal memory Display format Whole screen display or divided into 2 areas only when displaying the historical trend of the display data Time axis operation Can be expanded reduced and scrolled Memory information The following information of the retrieved data are displayed File name serial number of this instrument which is used to acquire data starting and ending time of data acquisition and user name when using key login function 12 4 12 3 Display Specifications Item Specifications Status display section Displays the status of this instrument on the upper part of the screen Date and time displayed group name user name when using key login function internal memory status external storage medium status only on models with storage drive alarm indication key lock status status of computation function e mail transmission function on models with these options equipped Others Items Related to Display Item Specifications Tags Number of characters Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Scale Displays scales on the trend screen Number of scales Scale division Up to 6 scales per a group 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 C10 selectable Message Number of messages Number of characters Writes and displays user defined messages Up to 8 messages Up to 16 alphanumeric characters Automatic display switching The displayed group can be automatically switched on the trend digital and
302. rnately displayed Data being acquired or waiting for a trigger for event data C Data acquisition stopped Note For event data that starts sampling when the trigger condition is met the display indicates that sampling is in progress even in the trigger wait state The trigger wait state can be determined on the bar graph 5 Memory usage of the display data acquisition area in the internal memory Displayed when acquisition of display data is enabled For models with a storage medium drive e The box indicates the amount of display data acquisition area in the internal memory The green bar shows the used space of the area e Time display indicates the remaining space of the display data acquisition area in the internal memory e n 16 The maximum number of display data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 16 represents this value The value n is the number of display data files in the internal memory Note In the following cases the display data is overwritten from the oldest file Use caution because the overwritten data is lost forever When there is no more remaining space of the display data acquisition area in the internal memory At this point the status display section shows Overwrite e When the number of display data files in the internal memory has exceeded 16 1 4 Display Function For models without storage medium drive Only the items below differ from For models with a storage medi
303. rotective earth might be defective Make sure to check them before operation Do Not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or vapors Operation in such environments constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers The cover should be removed by our qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some areas inside the instrument have high voltages External Connection Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external control unit Damage to the Protective Structure Operating this instrument in a manner not described in this manual may damage its protective structure Exemption from Responsibility We makes no warranties regarding the product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately we assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage direct or indirect caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product Handling Precautions of the Software e We makes no warranties regarding the software accompanying this product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately Use the software on a single PC You must purchase another copy of the software if you are to use the software on another PC Copying the software for any purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited Please store the original media containing the software in a safe place Reverse
304. roubleshooting 10 1 A List of Messages Occasionally error codes and messages appear on the screen while using this instrument The entire list of messages is given below Errors Related to Parameter Settings e Setting Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 1 System error Contact your nearest dealer 2 Incorrect date or time setting Check the settings See section 3 3 3 A disabled channel is selected Check communication command parameters Confirm the number of channels of this instrument 4 Incorrect function parameter Check communication command parameters 5 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Enter a proper value 6 Incorrect input character string Enter a proper character string 7 Too many characters Enter specified number of characters 8 Incorrect input mode Check communication command parameters See section 4 1 9 Incorrect input range code Check communication command parameters See section 4 1 21 Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel Check communication command parameters Confirm the mode setting See section 4 1 22 The upper and lower span limits are equal Cannot be the same value See section 4 1 23 The upper and lower scale limits are equal Cannot be the same value See section 4 1 30 The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span Select a value within th
305. rrow Keys Press the right arrow key while displaying the trend digital or bar graph screen to rotate the displayed group from group 1 to group 4 Press the left arrow key to rotate the displayed group in reverse order Bar Graph Screen lt Operation Mode gt For details see section 1 4 Display Function Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 5 1 Displaying Measured Data in Waveform Numerical Values or Bar Graph Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the bar graph screen GROUP 1 to GROUP 4 Displays group 1 to 4 The specified group name is displayed in place of GROUP1 to GROUP4 AUTO SCROLL ON Automatically switches the displayed groups see Explanation AUTO SCROLL OFF Cancels the auto switching of the displayed 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Changing the Displayed Group Using the Arrow Keys Press the right arrow key while displaying the trend digital or bar graph screen to rotate the displayed group from group 1 to group 4 Press the left arrow key to rotate the displayed group in reverse order Switching the Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens Using the Arrow Keys lt Operation Mode gt Procedure Changing the Display Press t
306. rs in a location that meets the following conditions The environment of the installation location is described in section 12 6 General Specifications Instrumentation panel This instrument is designed to be installed in an instrumentation panel panel mount type Well ventilated location Install the instrument in a well ventilated location to prevent the temperature inside the instrument from rising For the panel cut dimensions when arranging multiple this instrument see the next page Also when other instruments are arranged on the panel allow adequate space between them Location where mechanical vibration is small Select a location with low mechanical vibration for installation Horizontal location When installing this instrument make sure it does not tilt to the left or right 0 to 30 degrees of backward tilt angle is allowed Note e Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher or if the temperature changes rapidly In addition measurement errors will occur when using thermocouple input In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least an hour before using it e The life of the LCD may shorten degradation of the image quality if this instrument is used in a high temperature environment It is recommended that the backlight brightness of the LCD be set low if this instrument is installed in a hot environment around 40 C or high
307. rt number 263 Sender s address rejected by the server Check the sender s address 264 Some recipients addresses are invalid Check the recipient s address 265 SMTP protocol error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 266 Ethernet cable is not connected Check the cable connection 267 Could not connect to SMTP server e Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the network e If the SMTP server name is specified using an IP address check to see that the IP address is correct Bunooyseqnol g 268 E mail transmission request failed Contact your nearest dealer 269 E mail transfer error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 275 The current image cannot be output to the Web The setup screen cannot be output to the Web This message is displayed on the Web screen 276 Image data currently being created Unable to perform key operation Try again a little later This message is displayed on the Web screen 277 Could not output screen to Web Failed to create the image This message is displayed on the Web screen 10 3 10 1 A List of Messages e Errors related to FTP client For information regarding the FTP client
308. rument as shown in the following figure and adequately warm up the instruments the warm up time of this instrument is at least 30 minutes 2 Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and humidity is within the standard operating conditions see chapter 12 3 Apply appropriate input signals corresponding to 0 50 and 100 of the input range and calculate the errors from the readings If the error does not fall within the accuracy range of the specifications contact your nearest dealer Note ____ For thermocouple inputs you must measure the temperature of the input terminal and apply a voltage taking into account the reference junction temperature DC Voltage Measurement Measurement input terminals A te Un DOB OOOO L 00000 DC voltage standard 11 2 Calibration Temperature Measurement When Using an RTD Measurement input terminals A M HA The resistance of three lead JAAA wires must be equal Decade resistance box Model 2793 01 from M amp C Temperature Measurement When Using a thermocouple Thermocouple wires or Copper wire TC extension wire Measurement input terminals A m I 3 Thermocouple wire DC voltage standard Cold junction 0 C st
309. ruments may mutually affect the measured values If you need to make a parallel connection Turn OFF burnout Ground each instrument at a single common point Do not turn ON OFF the instrument during operation It may cause adverse affects on other instruments Resistance temperature detectors cannot be connected in parallel e e e e e e Bum pue uoneyyeisu m 2 3 Measurement Input Terminal Wiring Arrangement of the Measurement Input Terminal Blocks The measurement input terminal blocks are arranged on the rear panel of this instrument as shown in the figure below sToleyoyols o oO PA S Je if A f cos oms A o o o o ff o lo a a e Terminal cover screws a tat eat 1 7 z 7 Measurement input terminal blocks TAA lala AA A AA A A terminal cover is screwed over the measurement input terminal blocks A label showing the arrangement of the terminals is affixed to the cover Note e The installation position of each terminal block is fixed and cannot be changed Fora description on the connection of communication interfaces such as the serial or Ethernet interface see the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 75611 Measurement Input Assignments on the Measurement Input Terminal Block Me
310. rver name Up to 64 alphanumeric characters FTP connection gt Port number 1 to 65535 21 FTP connection gt Login name Up to 32 alphanumeric characters FTP connection gt Password Up to 32 alphanumeric characters FTP connection gt Account Up to 32 alphanumeric characters FTP connection gt PASV mode On Off Off FTP connection gt Initial path Up to 64 alphanumeric characters lt 5 Control Login Timeout gt C7 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Ethernet login gt Use Not Use Not Not Ethernet login gt Level admin user1 user2 user3 user4 user5 admin or user6 Ethernet login gt Level gt On Off On Off On Ethernet login gt Level gt User name Up to 16 alphanumeric characters admin Ethernet login gt Level gt Password Up to 6 alphanumeric characters 0 Application time out On Off Off Application time out gt Time 1 to 120 1 min Keep alive On Off On lt 6 Serial Memory out gt 1 on models without C7 C2 or C3 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Serial gt Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps 9600 bps Serial gt Data length 7or8 8 bit Serial gt Parity Odd Even and None Even Serial gt RS 232 gt Handshaking Off Off XON XON XON RS or CS RS Off Off Serial gt RS 422 485 gt Address 1 to 32 1 Serial gt Protocol Normal Modbus Modbus M Normal Memory output Ethernet or Serial Ethernet lt
311. ry is displayed Displays the historical trend for when the message selected using the cursor was written When memory summary is displayed Displays the historical trend for the data selected using the cursor L JUMP TO REPORT Only when memory summary is displayed Displays the most recent report data Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key eeeeeee RaaRRAA lg 3938887 p apn HATION SUMP TO HISTORY Recalling the Historical Trend for When the Alarm Occurred This operation is carried out on the alarm summary 1 Move the cursor using the up and down arrow keys and select the alarm coho E e O2W E25 Channel Tee Alarm IN Time Alarm QUT Time TI 101 4 Oct 65 08 14 15 Cursor TI 101 A t 05 0 13 59 TI 101 SH Oct 66 08 11 37 Oct 66 08 12 18 TI 161 1H Oct 5 08 11 23 Oct 66 08 12 32 FI 163 1H Oct 65 08 11 15 Oct 66 g8 12 40 TI 161 Oct 25 08 08 42 Oct 66 08 03 39 TI 161 A Oct 65 0 08 25 Oct BaS TI 161 3H Oct 65 68 06 64 Oct 66 08 05 44 TI 161 1H Oct 65 08 05 49 Oct 66 0 0 5 FI 163 1H Oct 65 08 05 42 Oct 66 08 07 07 TI 161 Oct 25 08 03 09 Oct 65 Gera4 06 TI 161 A Oct 66 08 02 52 Oct c5 08 04 22 TI 161 3H Oct 66 08 00 30 Oct 6 08 01 11 TI 161 1H Oct 65 08 00 16 Oct 65 08 01 25 FI 163 1H Oct 65 08 00 09 Oct 65 08 01 33 TI 161 Oct 65 07 7 35 Oct G6 07 58 32 TI 18 A Oct 66 B7 57219
312. s Our private protocol Modbus protocol Synchronization method Connection method Transmission speed Data length Stop bit Parity Communication distance Start stop asynchronous transmission 4 wire half duplex multi drop connection 1 N where N 1 to 31 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps 7 or 8 bits 1 bit Odd even or none Up to 1200 m Modbus Mode RTU MASTER or RTU SLAVE RTU MASTER Reads data from the slave device Computation function M1 or PM1 is necessary RTU SLAVE Master device reads writes data from this instrument 12 9 suoneoyioeds B 12 5 Specifications of Optional Functions Ethernet Communication Interface C7 Item Specifications Connection Ethernet 10BASE T Protocols SMTP HTTP1 0 FTP TCP UDP IP ARP ICMP E mail transmission Destination address Two groups of destinations can be specified using up to 150 alphanumeric characters Mail type E mail is automatically transmitted at the following times Groups of destinations can be selected for each mail type Alarm activation release at specified times status changes recovery from a power failure memory end detection and occurrence of error related to the external storage medium or FTP client and report creation Web server Displays this instrument screen image alarm information and measured data on a web browser Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 to 6 0 Page type Monitor page Monito
313. s activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped Data are overwritten when the trigger is activated again Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state dataare overwritten Press the STOP key to terminate data acquisition Data acquisition AN Trigger wait rz Trigger activated When the internal memory is divided into blocks An event data file each in the blocks is created Press the START key to enter the trigger wait state After the trigger is activated data are acquired for the specified time data length see section 8 11 and the operation is stopped When the trigger is activated again data are acquired and stored to the next block When all blocks are full and the trigger is activated data are overwritten to the first block Every time the trigger is activated during the trigger wait state data are overwritten to the next block Press the STOP key to terminate data acauisition First block Second block Last block Data acquisition Data acquisition Data acquisition Trigger wat i Trigger wai i Trigger wat z Trigger activated gt Trigger activated S gt Trigger activated e The event data in the internal memory can be confirmed with the memory summary See section 1 4 e When a power failure occurs the event data file in the internal memory is closed as one file 1 33 suoloun j
314. s selectable from 4 to 12 hours minutes on time axis trip lines line widths are selectable from 1 2 and 3 dots messages up to eight different messages of up to 16 characters for each channel no tag zone display partial expanded display Zone display and partial expanded display are available Digital screen Number of indication channels 6 channels per screen maximum Number of group screens 4 Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Numerical value alarm indication unit channel no tag Bar graph screen Direction Vertical or horizontal selectable Number of indication channels 6 channels per screen maximum Number of group screens 4 Scales 4 to 12 divisions selectable Base position of bar Left or right end or center only for horizontal display Display update rate 1 s 2 s when the scan interval is 2 s Contents Bar graph numerical value alarm indication unit scale channel no tag Overview screen Measured values and alarm status of all channels Information screen Alarm summary Displays the list of alarms Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Message summary Display the list of messages and time Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Memory summary Display the file list in internal memory Capable to switch to historical trend screen by cursor pointing Historical trend screen Display the retrieved data from internal or exte
315. s the data collectively when the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped Display data event data manual sampled data TLOG data M1 PM1 option and report data M1 PM1 option are to be saved Collectively Saving Data MENU key switch to setting mode 7 soft key select Save Load Clear data gt 3 soft key select Save data From the operation mode use the above keys to save data collectively Note You cannot perform the operation of collectively saving data if computation is in progress 7 13 suoljeiedo peo enes ed 7 4 Saving Measured Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sample This section explains how to save the measured data of all channels at arbitrary times Saving Measured Data at Arbitrary Times Manual Sample lt Operation Mode gt 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Manual sample soft key The measured data of all channels is acquired to the internal memory Nanual Nedia AlarmACK Message sample Explanation Manual Sample Operation When manual sample is executed the instantaneous values of all channels excluding measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to Off are acquired to the internal memory Note e Up to 50 sets of data can be acquired to the internal memory When 50 is exceeded the data is overwritten from the oldest data e The number of manual sample da
316. se the above keys to open the following setting display Setup Mode AUX Tag Channel Channel Memory alarm lh Language English Partial Time zone Difference from GMT 6 Hedia FIFO Off Use Not Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to Partial A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Saving the Settings in Basic Setting Mode 1 Press the ESC key The display returns to basic setting menu 2 Press the End soft key A confirmation dialog box appears 3 Select Yes and press the DISP ENTER key The operation screen is displayed Enabling Disabling the Partial Expanded Display Function e Partial To use the partial expanded display function select Use initial value is Not Note The partial expanded display settings of all channels are set to Off when the Partial Use Not setting is changed in basic setting mode 6 21 U9 U09 peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suonesado al 6 22 6 12 Displaying Partially Expanded Waveforms Detailed Setting of the Partial Expanded Display lt Setting Mode gt Procedure Opening the Setting Display MENU key sw
317. sesssstessscersesseereosees 3 13 buUrMOULGSTSCHON s r m we 4 1 Burnout S t i ceinetan caccacccetesccsaceazadsatscebisvasa toianasccnasdesesane 4 2 C Calculation expression 8 3 Calibrating this instrUMeNE cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeteeees 11 2 capacity internal memory CH set 6 1 channel color 6 11 Channel displayCOlOM sisisi sztereo 6 10 channel registration to QrOUPS sssessssrsssssrrissssruerusrrusrenereeae 6 1 Characters clearing computed results remote control eee 1 53 clearing the data clearing the internal memory MONO rvs cence se concen a E EE COMMON logarithm ssenarini nk communication command log m COMMUNICATION input data ceciciseceerssvsccceeetereecsewens compact flash memory card slot computation channels z computation data gropou sses COMPUTATION TUMCHON iiisisssernssstisristnerriiserieissi sarasin computation ICOM eeseecccecsecevsrectesreses ene adetenveeesnreentaeneds computation operators Index 1 COMPUTING ClOMON ties scccvecscscccesscessacesectsscscsstcoccevosessecereierseees COMPUTING CQUALIONS eseistas esini conditions of the remote control terminals constants ace ees enr EAEE E crimp on lugs with isolation sleeves ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees cursor alarm summary cursor historical trend CUrsSOr OVEIVIEW srrisesnsia n aia D dally rePOP en csecvensicce vane caseteep
318. specifications YES Is the range span setting appropriate NO YES Are taking measures against noise NO YES Is the environmental temperature kept constant NO YES Is the input wiring correct NO YES Is the input wiring parallel NO with other equipment YES Is the RJC setting correct TC input YES Contact your nearest dealer Change the input to meet the specifications See section 12 1 Change the range span setting See section 4 1 e Move the input wire away from the noise source e Ground this instrument e Ground the object being measured e Insulate the thermocouple and the object being measured e Use shielded cables for input e Change the integral time of the input A D converter see section 4 1 e Use the input filter rolling average See section 4 1 e Attach the input terminal cover properly e Protect the input terminal from wind or fans Keep the temperature fluctuation near the input terminal small e Wire correctly see section 2 3 e Attach the terminal block correctly e Fasten the terminal screws correctly e Insulate the RTD from the ground e Replace burnt thermocouples e Stop using the burnout function of other equipment e Ground this instrument and other equipment at one point e Disconnect parallel wiring Use a double element TC for instance NO Set it correctly See section 4 1
319. ss occurred FTP File Transfer Log The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs 002 002 Time No Code Flag File Name Jan 31 2001 06 58 08 282 HOSTNAME S 13106588 DHR Jan 31 2001 66 58 88 282 HOSTNAME P 1316588 DHR l File name FTP server P primary S secondary Error code Error code Date and time when the file transfer was made Web Browser Operation Log The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs 003 003 Time Request No Parameter Jan 31 66 52 38 Key DOWN Jan 31 06 51 21 Screen TREND GROUP 2 Jan 31 06 50 28 Message 155 Listart l Operation Date time Type Error code see section 10 1 E mail Transmission Log The number of the log displayed at the last line of the screen total number of logs 004 004 Time Type No Recipient Error Jan 31 06 16 49 Alarm 264 1 Some recipients a Jan 31 66 16 19 Alarm 1 HS Jan 31 86 16 17 Fail 1 2 H S uu Jan 31 06 15 53 Alarm 1 aS Recipient address Recipient No Error code see section 10 1 Date time Mail type suonuny 19410 JO suoneado 9 5 Monitoring the Remaining Space in the Internal Memory and Outputting Alarms F1 Option Describes the procedure for setting the function in which the time remaining when writing to the internal memory is monitored and alarms a relay contact output are output This function is called memory alarm
320. ss s start stop computation remote control ie start stop data acquisition remote control e ee 1 52 Starling the ACQUISILION viccecsniccecescevseterssinicnedsceessteesteeveten starting the computation starting the report statistical computation stopping the acquisition stopping the computation stopping the report SUMAG serias AE EAER SUM Scal Eininn nE edain sum scale report sum scale TLOG system CONMQUIATION sists sscsteseants cca cersiseersmenterse aeerees system information screen z SYSTSMSChOGMIN araar ari aseina boade aeaaea oda Eee IEE T MPAG EE A T A T tag NAME eoero ssatina aan a Aeee Tag Channel i tags comptation Channels ccscccscsseeecsesseesseesseceeees 8 1 ING even sae nian AEE 4 4 MQMPOt ALUN sisena annee Ee EEE ERSE TEES 4 2 temperature Unit sssini tiasaan 1 57 4 1 terminal assignment option terminal block s s s 2 9 LIGHTNING torque wessccscccccvecrscseesecccccsudedacsenatniseesevctsewensindere 2 3 Time ROUT jaeeeeereeeereerpreer rere peeerrrec ree rr reerrecct re ann 7 4 Time saver Pee li Time adj 9 12 time difference 3 16 UME ZONE sriiysszsesen siae ne aS ESEI EEEE 3 16 Time NOUT iesnunninnaaeni nna 8 15 TIME AIV sokissa e iaiaaeaia 6 5 timer 8 9 timer mode 1 45 Timer NOus aE ED ae 8 11 MUNN WY o E E T T 7 4 TLOG o TLOG cOmpUATION aia cas nei en a
321. sured Data Acquisition to the Internal Memory and Data Save to the External Storage Medium e If you select Trigger or Rotate the Block Data length Pretrigger and Trigger boxes are displayed e Block Select the number of blocks when dividing the event data acquisition area into blocks Select from 2 4 8 and 16 Select 1 if you do not wish to divide the area into blocks When acquiring both display data and event data the possible selections are 1 2 and 4 e Data length Set the size data length of a single block of the event data acquisition area in terms of the amount of time data is to be acquired The selectable data length varies depending on the sampling interval sample rate setting as shown in the table below It also depends on the block setting and the number of channels Sample 0 25 rate s 0 5 1 2 5 10 30 60 120 300 600 Data length 3 min choices 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h 3min 3min 3min 5min 5min 5min 10min 10min 10min 10min 10 min 20min 20min 20min 20min 20 min 30 min 30min 30min 30min 30min 1h 1h 1h 1h 1th th ih 1h ih 1h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 2h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 3h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 4h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 6h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 8h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 12h 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 1day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 2day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 3day 5day 5day 5
322. t 26 08 14 15 TI 101 A Oct 65 08 13 59 TI 161 SH Oct 65 08 11 37 Oct 66 0 12 18 TI 161 1H Oct 65 08 11 23 Oct 65 08 12 32 Mark indicates the alarm status Cursor selects the alarm information Historical trend of the data containing he selected alarm information POS Alarm Mark Indication The mark indication varies depending on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication as follows Non hold Hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Alarm Occurrence o Release z 7 g Alarm information is not displayed For a description on the historical trend display see page 1 26 For a description on the hold non hold setting of alarm indication see section 1 3 Alarm Function 1 23 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 4 Display Function Message Summary The messages and the times when they were entered are displayed in a list e Upto 100 messages can be displayed e By selecting a message from the list using arrow keys the historical trend of the display data or event data containing the message can be recalled Number of the message displayed at the bottom of the screen Number of the messages in the internal memory Message Date and time the message was written User name who wrote the message is displayed if you use the key login Ged tS function 04 04 Messase Time PROCESS2 Oct 5 2003 98 11 30 m PROCESS1 Oct 5 2083 98 02 42 START Oct G5 2663 07 55 16 START Oct 05 2003 07 54 13
323. t are set up for snapshot FTP transfer Daylight Savings Time When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be enabled this instrument automatically sets the clock ahead by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on June 1 the time is set ahead to 10 o clock June 1 e When the specified time is reached at which the daylight savings time adjustment is to be disabled this instrument automatically sets the clock back by one hour Example If the time is set to 9 o clock on December 1 the time is set back to 8 o clock December 1 Temperature Unit The temperature unit can be setto Celsius C or Fahrenheit F This applies to all channels 1 57 suoloun jo uoneueldxy Chapter 2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 Handling Precautions This section describes the precautions to be taken when using this instrument and the external storage medium Make sure to read this section before using this instrument Handling Precautions for this instrument e This instrument uses many plastic parts When cleaning wipe using a dry soft cloth Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation Do not bring charged objects near the signal terminals Doing so can lead to malfunction Do not pour volatile agents on the LCD panel keys or other parts of the instrument nor leave them in contact with rubber or PVC products for an extended time Doing so ca
324. t point are acquired Up to 50 samples of data can be stored in the internal memory The header string can be written into the manual sampled data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format ASCII format File name Mddhhmma DMN TLOG data option The measured computed data of all channels is acquired to the internal memory at the end of every interval period a timer specifies Up to 400 data sets can be stored in the internal memory The header string can be written into the TLOG data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format Binary format undisclosed File name Mddhhmma DTG Report data option Consists of hourly daily weekly and monthly reports Data are computed at intervals depending on the report type one hour for hourly report one day for daily report etc Data are added to the internal memory at the end of every interval period Up to 40 reports can be stored in the internal memory Each report file can contain up to 12 measured computed channels of report data The header string can be written into the report data file a character string that is common to all data files Data format ASCII format File name Hourly report Mddhhmma DHR Daily report Mddhhmma DDR Weekly report Mddhhmma DWR Monthly report Mddhhmma DMR Setup data The setup data of this instrument File name Up to eight alphanumeric characters Extension PNL S
325. t value reset value and the original value is carried over after the reset Reset Count Counts the number of times the reset occurs This value can be used to calculate the total sum value up to that count See Calculating the Total Sum Value on the page Assign computation channels as shown below then enter equations and constant Note next S e In a single scan interval calculation is performed on numbered channels in the order from smallest to largest You must arrange channel numbers and uses according to the table below For details see the Note on the next page e If the scan interval s pulse input value is larger than the reset value computation cannot be performed Channel Equation Uses 31 D6 No of pulses per scan interval 32 34 31 GE K01 32 Pulse sum value reset count 33 34 31 GE K01 34 31 K01 No of pulses exceeding the reset value 34 344 31 LT KO1 344 31 33 Pulse sum value Constants Uses KO1 Reset value pulse sums exceeding this value are reset Channel 32_Reset Count Equation 34 31 GE K01 32 Calculates the number of times the pulse sum value was reset 34 31 GE K01 is 1 if the pulse sum value 34 31 is greater than or equal to the reset value K01 otherwise it is 0 The value of channel 32 increments by 1 when the pulse sum value exceeds the reset value Channel 33_No of Pulses Exceeding the Reset Value Equation 34 31 GE K01 34 31
326. ta points in the internal memory can be confirmed using memory summary see section 1 4 e For the data format of the manual sampled data see appendix 5 Data Formats of ASCII Files e You can assign the manual sample function to the USER key and save the data simply by pressing a single key For the procedure in assigning the function to the USER key see section 9 1 7 14 7 5 Saving the Screen Image Data Snapshot This section explains how to save the screen image data to the external storage Medium This function is available on the following models e e Models with an external storage drive or Models with the Ethernet communication interface C7 option that are set up for snapshot FTP transfer Snapshot lt Operation Mode gt Procedure 1 In operation mode press the FUNC key A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the Snapshot soft key The message Data are being saved to media is displayed and the screen image data is saved Hath Snap STOP shot Keylock Note This operation can be assigned to the USER key If it is screen image data can be saved simply by pressing a single key When using the steps above only the screen image in the operation mode is possible However when using the USER key screen images in the setting and basic setting mode can also be saved For the procedure in assigning a function to the USER key see section 9 1 Saving th
327. tched ON OFF for each channel Burnout upscale downscale selectable Normal less than or equal to 2 kQ Burnout More than or equal to 100 kQ parallel capacity less than or equal to 0 1 uF Current Approximately 10 uA Reference junction compensation Internal external selectable for each channel A D resolution A D integration time 16 bits 3 ch model Selectable from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz or AUTO automatic selection from 20 ms 50 50and 16 7 ms by detection of power supply frequency 6 ch model Selectable from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms or AUTO automatic selection from 20 ms and 16 7 ms by detection of power supply frequency 12 ch model Selectable from 20 ms 50 Hz 16 7 ms 60 Hz 100 ms or AUTO automatic selection from 20 ms and 16 7 ms by detection of power supply frequency 12 1 suoneoiyioeds 12 1 Input Specifications Item Specifications Filter 3 ch model Signal damping On off selectable for each channel Time constant selectable from 2 5 and 10 seconds 6 ch model Moving average On off selectable for each channel Number of samples to be averaged is selectable from 2 to 16 12 ch model Moving average On off selectable for each channel Number of samples to be averaged is selectable from 2 to 16 Computation Differential computation Linear scaling Square root Between any two channels Available for Volt TC RTD and DI ranges Availa
328. te and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data is saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every day after and at 0 hour every day the same time for both in this example 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 7 21 0 00 7 22 0 00 gt Start Saved to the external storage medium Example 3 Auto save interval or data length 12 hours Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data is saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every 12 hours after and at 0 hour every day 0 hour occurs at the same time as the 12 hour timing 719 13 10 7 200 00 12 00 7 210 00 12 00 7 220 00 12 00 gt Start Saved d the e storage ae Example 4 Auto save interval or data length 2 day Date and time when data is saved to the external storage medium 0 hour every day After starting at 13 10 on July 19th data is saved at 0 hour on July 20th and then every 2 days after and at 0 hour every day the 2 day timing occurs at the same time as 0 hour 7 19 13 10 7 20 0 00 7 21 0 00 7 22 0 00 gt I I I Start saved to the external storage medium Note If the saving of the data to the external storage medium is not complete due to reasons such as insufficient free space the next time data is saved to the external storage medium unsaved data is also saved Event data during Free
329. te et ota eiiael a e ened et ee 11 2 11 3 Replacement of Paltsi cuice caaetecsecencesesccesasneesnciseadaietcnaieestedsccgeeseeteas vaste cadben vagedecsiseaass 11 4 12 1 AnputSpecitications kesised diene tinea 12 1 12 2 Alarm FUNCTION Specifications occ cceseccccesecccstzeteccedisessatcessevennsetee dues stannesceescetunacusneedays 12 3 123 Display Specifications sristi eea e aa a i ui raea 12 4 12 4 Data Storage Specifications sssrinin eoni aona a arana sa aS 12 6 12 5 Specifications of Optional FUNCtONS s ssissserssssssrsissrorcunsrercarsiesanunseiiesriissoenadeeienearaasat 12 9 12 6 General Specification seis ccvccveceesocedceh ccesdeviiceestesees dads a nE esnpehschbeeei eters tested 12 13 12 7 Dimensional DraWingS wuvseisacsccasceigeecesenesssdeasaqcesead edenpacety saadee dageeccnscde sciceledsanensecsesnescee cd 12 17 Appendix 1 Time Estimate for Writing Display Event Data to the Internal Memory ccessseeeseceeseseeeeesseeeseeneeneseeeneesneees App 1 Appendix 2 Meaning and Syntax Of Equations cccccecceseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeenees App 6 Appendix 3 Pulse Measurement Setting Example Pulse Sum Value Reset If It Exceeds a Fixed Value PM1 Option App 11 Appendix 4 Types of Data Created on this instrument and Their UseS eeeeeeee App 13 Appendix 5 Data Formats of ASCII Files eeceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeseeeeeneeennees App 14 Appendix 6 List O
330. teascressevavte s Alatim delay WME cesccsscessssesccvicssncassersasevnresasmcacereacae alarm delay time alarmi ICOM israse nee teenies alarm indication isenana aa alarm output a alarm Output relay ACHOMN ssec sissantina alarmi SUMMALY sneseceasccczsnsataznasccstassoizeseansvasteseidasatianeetyesnesnds alarm trigger y alarm type rsrsrs iisi inate andre ES n ESTEEN EES AlanmAGK enne a E alarmACK 4 alarms computation channel 0cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees All CMAMME CISPIAY cssecscsssssccsssesustessesesanertseususvacdesaasenszcanaecs 5 1 AND isese esaa sanae aae oee rE Oaa a angea EE rE applying a trigger es arithmetical OPCrAtlONS viiccccccaveeveecessecseveersteccserreccdereeess 1 42 INOW KOY Sienasse diiin cvscasetesriterecosessersasinade 3 1 ASCII file PULONOG OU css vssdasdcndefes a a a E auto logout AUIO SAVC E E A een aes Auto Save Interval ssteissi eenrdvaiayas auto switching of groups g AVENS Eos cocoate Bante sore E a a A EE ee B gt Backgro nd sirinin aA T 6 17 background COlOM mssins 5 10 6 16 backlight SAVOMscrssccsceescecessesgepseeeves enen nas 1 27 3 13 bar graph base position eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaes 6 18 bar graph screen ise basic setting mode 3 3 Behavior s ceccscceiesiciees 48 Block 7 3 DIOCK vvcseceenevenees 1 33 block display 1 15 BOUDRY assier a ee 6 23 BriQhtM SS iiias 3 13 brightness of the display cccssccsss
331. tervals for different models are listed in the table below Model Number of Measurement Channels Scan Interval 3 ch model 3 channels 250 ms 6 ch model 6 channels 1sor2s 12chmodel 12 channels 1sor2s Input Type and Computation You can select the input type of a measurement channel from the table below In addition difference computation square root computation and scaling can be performed on the measured data and display or save the computed result as measured data Input type Description DC voltage Measures a DC voltage in the range of 20 mV to 50 V DC current The current signal is converted to a voltage signal by a shunt resistor attached to the input terminal and measured The measurable range is the range equivalent to the DC voltage range indicated above after converting the current to the voltage signal Thermocouple Measures temperatures corresponding to the temperature range of each thermocouple type such as R S B K E J T N W L U and WRe3 25 Resistance temperature Measures temperatures corresponding to the appropriate range for detector Pt100 JPt100 or Pt1000 ON OFF input Displays the contact input or voltage input signals by correlating them to 0 or 100 of the display range Contact input Closed contact is ON 1 Open contact is OFF 0 Voltage input Less than 2 4 V is OFF 0 Greater than or equal to 2 4 V is ON 1 Pulse input For the description see page 1 7 1 Pt1000
332. the computation is stopped For all other cases applying the remote signal produces no effect e Manual sampling M sample e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e The instantaneous values of all measurement and computation channels excluding the measurement channels that are set to Skip and the computation channels that are turned Off can be stored to the internal memory e Loads the setup data Pnl1 load Pnl2 load Pnl3 load e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e The setup data of the file LOAD 1 PNL LOAD 2 PNL or LOAD 3 PNL that is saved in the external storage medium are loaded for use The file LOAD 1 PNL LOAD 2 PNL or LOAD 3 PNL must be created and saved to the external storage medium beforehand Note This item can be set on models with a external storage drive e Writing messages Message1 to Message8 e Remote input Trigger 250 ms or more e Displays a message at the position corresponding to the time when the signal was applied on the trend screen The displayed message is also written to the internal memory When the data acquisition to the internal memory is stopped messages cannot be displayed or written Applying a remote signal produces no effect e Snapshot Snapshot e Remote input signal Trigger 250 ms or more e Saves the current screen image data to the external storage medium The snapshot function operates in all modes operation mode setting mode and
333. the oldest block in the memory when all blocks are full Combination of data to be acquired Selectable from Display data only Event data only or Display data and event data only for trigger or rotate mode 12 6 12 4 Data Storage Specifications Item Specifications Maximum sampling length Per floppy disk during manual save The sampling length the maximum data length can be derived from the following equation Maximum sampling length the maximum number of data points per channel x sampling interval Maximum number of data points per channel Calculated from internal memory capacity types of data data size and number of measurement or computation channels data to be stored Data type Maximum number of data points per channel Display data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 100 000 Display data and event data e Display data 900 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 4 number of computation channels x 8 Except the maximum number of data points is 75 000 Event data 300 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 30 000 Event data only 1 200 000 bytes number of measurement channels x 2 number of computation channels x 4 Except the maximum number of data points is 120 000 Example of
334. the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display Tag DOO Moving average Count Alarm delay time 10 s OA ea e Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The Unit is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box suoie1 do dnjyes wiejy pue yndu juswsinseoyy gt 4 1 Setting Parameters Related to Measurement Inputs Setting the Range e First CH Last CH Select the measurement channel for setting the range e Range First select the input mode in the Mode entry box from Volt TC RTD Dl Delta Sqrt and Scale Then set other parameters such as Range Span Lower Upper according to the selected input mode as described below Set Skip for channels that are not to perform measurements or displays Note You cannot set the same value to Span _L and Span _U e When set to Volt input Range Select
335. the options installed You can use only the terminals that correspond to the options you purchased e When pulse input PM1 is not installed Remote input R1 Without alarm output terminals FAIL Memory end FAIL Memory end output F1 Alarm output A1 02 01 Remote input R1 With A1 FAIL Memory end FAIL Memory end output F1 Alarm output A2 04 03 02 01 Remote input R1 With A2 FAIL Memory end FAIL Memory end output F1 Alarm output A3 A 05 04 03 02 01 Remote input R1 With A3 NC normally closed C common NO normally opened Relay contact output terminal 1 to 8 C common Remote input terminal The alarm output terminals 01 to 06 are indicated using l01 to 106 in the alarm output settings The remote input terminals 1 to 8 are indicated using numbers 1 to 8 in the remote output settings 2 9 Bundi pue uoneyyjeisu m 2 4 Optional Input Output Terminal Wiring e When pulse input PM1 is installed Pulse input PM1 8 7 6 Remote input PM1 Without alarm output terminals Ne NC E Q H IH ICH I 3 L 4 c AJD L NO NIGZ E FAIL Memory end 5 FAIL Memory end output F1 Alarm output A1 Pulse input PM1 oN A 02 01 8 7 6 Remote input PM1 With A1 bad NC I NC NC HHO Ie
336. ting the bar graph base position MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 3 soft key select Zone Graph or 6 soft key select Math Zone Graph From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display For measurement channels For computation channels m1 PM1 option fo MELO e First cH I Last CH ar First cH 31 Last CH ar Zone Zone Lower ag Lower ag Upper 100 Upper 100 Graph Division i0 Bar graph Scale position 1 Graph Division 16 Bar graph Scale position 1 Normal Normal e Setting the direction of the bar graphs MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 4 soft key select View Direction LCD From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display pot 05 2003 09 44 36 OF me 9 View LCD Direction Brightness 2 ST Saver Timedtt Background White TE th Trend line 2 dot Restore KeytAlm Trip line 2 dot Grid 10 div Scroll time 5s Scale digit Normal Horizon Wertical Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all th
337. tion is started Timer to be used Three timers are available You can specify the timer to be used for each channel Sum scale of the TLOG SUM In the sum computation TLOG SUM of time series data are summed over the scan interval However for flow values that have units s min or h a simple summation results in the actual value not matching the computed result because the scan interval and the unit of the input values are different In these cases the unit of the data measured over the scan interval is converted to match the unit of the input values and the computation is performed For example if the scan interval is 2 s and the input value is 100 m 3 min a simple summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute However if the computing unit is set to min then 2 s 60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the value is added giving aresultthathasam min unit The following equations are applied The scan interval unit is in seconds Off measured value S measured value x scan interval min gt measured value x scan interval 60 n measured value x scan interval 3600 1 45 suoloun jo uoneueldxy 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option Reset action Whether or not to reset the computed result at every timeout is selectable The figure below shows the action of TLOG SUM computation Example Result of the TLOG SUM computation Interval 1 2 3 Reset R
338. to 4 On Off Off Alarm gt Type H Upper limit L Lower limit R Upper limit on rate H of change r Lower limit on rate of change T Delay upper limit t Delay lower limit h Difference upper limit Difference lower limit Alarm gt Value 0 000 Alarm gt Rly On Off Off Alarm gt No 101 to 106 101 1 N3 option 2 Tag Moving average or Filter Alarm delay time Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value First CH 01 to 12 01 Last CH 01 to 12 01 Tag Up to 16 alphanumeric characters 3 CH model Filter gt Filter Off 2s 5s 10s Off 6 CH 12CH model Moving average gt Count Off 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 or 16 Off Alarm delay time 1 sto 3600s 10s App 27 xipueddy E Appendix 6 List of Parameters 3 Trend Save interval User key Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Trend Save interval gt Time div 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min 30 min 1 h 2 h 1 min 4h or10h Trend Save interval gt Auto save interval 10 minutes to 31 days ih USER key gt Action None Trigger AlarmACK MathStart Stop MathReset AlarmACK ManualSample Message1 Message8 Snapshot or Media 4 Message Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Message gt Characters No 1 to No 8 Up to 16 alphanumeric characters 5 Display Display 1 Group set Trip line 2 Color 3 Zone Graph 4 View Direction LOD 5 Math
339. to be displayed The behavior when the four keys are pressed is as follows Up arrow key Displays the report data corresponding to report data being displayed 1 Down arrow key Displays the report data corresponding to report data being displayed 1 Right arrow key Displays the report data corresponding to report data being displayed 10 However if such report data does not exist the most recent report data is displayed maximum report data number Left arrow key Displays the report data corresponding to report data being displayed 10 However if such report data does not exist the oldest report data is displayed report data number 1 Note Even if a new report data is created while displaying the report data the display is not updated The most recent report data is displayed by performing either operation below e Press the right arrow key e Press the DISP ENTER key and display the report data again from the screen menu Explanation Displayed Contents For the description of the displayed contents see pages as followed Alarm summary page 1 23 Message summary page 1 24 Memory summary page 1 25 5 7 su 19 5 uoe1a do y uo suoeiado p 5 4 Displaying Measured Data Previously Acquired Historical Trend There are four methods for displaying the historical trend e Display from the alarm summary see section 5 3 e Display from the message summary see section 5 3 e Display from the memory summ
340. to read the transfer connection settings Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server 284 FTP transfer setting error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284 Character String and Details MODE Internal processing error LOCAL Internal processing error REMOTE The destination file name is not correct Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files ABORT File transfer abort was requested by the server Check the server for the reason for the abort request 10 5 Bunooyseaqnol g 10 1 A List of Messages Code Message 285 FTP data connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285 Character String and Details SOCKET Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection BIND Failed the transfer connection command CONNECT Failed the transfer connection LISTEN Failed the transfer connection reception ACCEPT Failed to accept the transfer connection SOCKNAME Internal processing error RECV Failed to receive data over the transfer connection SEND Failed to send data over the transfer connection 286 FTP file transfer error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 286 Character String and Details READ Internal processing error WRITE
341. ue from 1 h 2 h 5 h 10 h 20 h 50 h 100 h and off Off Memory alarm function is disabled Note __ You can have the instrument make notification of an occurrence of a memory alarm using the e mail transmission function of the Ethernet communication interface C7 option See the communication interface user s manual 9499 040 75611 9 10 9 6 Setting the Remote Control Function R1 PM1 Option This section explains how to assign a particular action to the remote input terminal Assign Actions to the Remote Input Terminals lt Basic Setting Mode gt Opening the Setting Display MENU key switch to setting mode Control gt Hold down the FUNC key for 3 seconds switch to basic setting mode gt 9 soft key select Option gt 1 soft key select Remote or 1 soft key select Remote Pulse From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display thernet Setup Mode Cink Setup Mode Remote Pulse Remote Pulse No Action No Action 1 1 2 None 2 None 3 None 3 None 4 None 4 None 5 None 5 None 6 None 6 Pulse 7 None Pulse 8 None 8 Pulse None Hemory Trigger AlarmAck Next 1 6 None Hemory Trigger AlarmACK Next 1 6 Operations on the Display 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select
342. um drive e When auto save is specified The box indicates a display data file The green bar shows the progress of the data acquisition Time display shows the remaining time a display data file is created For the description of display data and auto save see section 1 5 Data Storage Function 6 Memory usage of the event data acquisition area in the internal memory Displayed when acquisition of event data is enabled For models with a storage medium drive e When the acquisition mode is Free e The box indicates the amount of event data acquisition area in the internal memory The green bar shows the used space of the area e Time display indicates the remaining time of the event data acquisition area in the internal memory n 16 The maximum number of event data files that can be written to the internal memory is 16 16 represents this value The value n is the number of event data files in the internal memory For the description of free mode see 1 5 Data Storage Function Note In the following cases the event data is overwritten from the oldest file Use caution because the overwritten data is lost forever When there is no more remaining time of the event data acquisition area in the internal memory The status display section shows Overwrite e When the number of event data files in the internal memory has exceeded 16 When the mode is Trigger or Rotate e Bar graph Displays
343. under the measurement category II e This instrument is an installation category II product Ensure that noise does not enter the measurement circuit Keep the measurement circuit away from the power supply cable power supply circuit and ground circuit It is desirable that the object under measurement is not a noise source However if this is not avoidable insulate the object under measurement and the measurement circuit In addition ground the object under measurement Shielded wires are effective against noise caused by electrostatic induction As necessary connect the shield to the ground terminal of this instrument make sure this does not lead to grounding at two points Twisting the measurement circuit wires at short intervals is relatively effective against noise caused by electromagnetic induction Make sure to ground the protective ground terminal through a small grounding resistance less than or equal to 100 9 When using the reference junction compensation of this instrument through thermocouple input take measures to stabilize the temperature at the terminal section Always attach the terminal cover Do not use thick wires with high heat radiations effects cross sectional area of 0 5 mm or smaller recommended Keep the ambient temperature consistent Large temperature fluctuations can occur as a result of such things as turning ON OFF a nearby fan Connecting the input wires in parallel with other inst
344. up Settings This section explains how to rename the groups of trend digital and bar graph screens and how to register channels to those groups Group Name Channel Registration to Groups lt Setting Mode gt Setup Display MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 1 soft key select Group set Trip line From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display pet hs 200 69 39 27 MNES Group number 1 Group set Group name GROUP 1 CH set 61 82 03 04 05 66 Trip line il nN w a Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The Group name and CH set are set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Renaming Groups and Registering Channels to Groups e Group number Select the group you wish to set from 1 to 4 e Group name Enter the group name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters The initial v
345. utation channels can be specified However reports are not created for channels that are set to Skip or those that have the computation turned Off Sum scale Select the sum scale from the following Off measured computed data every scan interval s X measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval min measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 60 h measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 3600 day measured computed data every scan interval x scan interval 86400 uondo LINd 10 LIN suoneiado pay uonouny Yodsy pue uoneyndwog eo 8 6 Creating Reports Starting Stopping the Report Function lt Operation Mode gt The start stop operation of the creation of reports is synchronized to the start stop operation of the data acquisition to the internal memory Starting the Report Function Press the START key The report function starts When the time to create the report arrives the report data is written to the internal memory As shown in the following figure the internal memory icon changes from stop indication to run indication The computation icon is also displayed Shir 41 4 ee Computation icon Internal memory icon Stopping the Report Function 1 Press the STOP key The following dialog box appears for confirmation ET to D Tmin di y UA 204 Hem Hath Memory Cancel o fec 8B 2 Select Mem Math or M
346. ute Between pulse input terminal to ground terminal 1000 VDC 1 minute 100 Q or less Transport and Storage Conditions Item Specifications Ambient temperature Humidity Vibration Shock 25 C to 60 C 5 to 95 RH No condensation is allowed 10 to 60 Hz 4 9 m s maximum 392 m s maximum while being packed Safety and EMC Standards Item Specifications CSA Certified by CSA22 2 No 1010 1 Installation category Overvoltage category II Pollution degree 2 UL Certified by UL61010B 1 CSA NRTL C CE EMC Complies with EN61326 1 Complies with EN61000 3 2 Complies with EN61000 3 3 Complies with EN55011 Class A Group 1 Low voltage Complies with EN61010 1 Measurement category II C Tick Complies with AS NZS2064 Class A Group 1 1 Installation category Overvoltage category describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition It implies the regulation for impulse withstand voltage Il applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like distribution board 2 Pollution degree describes the degree to which a solid liquid or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering 2 applies to normal indoor atmosphere Normally only non conductive pollution occurs 3 Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation and electrical instruments supplied with power from fixed equipment suc
347. values at specified time intervals over the time interval There are three timers used to set the time interval For detail see page 1 45 Data That Can Be Used in Equations For TLOG computation only measured and computed data can be used For all other computations all types of data can be used e Measured data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations If scaling is in effect the scaled values are used in the computation e Computed data The data are specified using channel numbers in computing equations e Constants K01 to K30 The values assigned to KO1 to K30 can be used as constants Enter the values as K01 to K30 in the equations Range of constants Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 e Communication input data C01 to C12 Data that have been specified through the communication interface C2 C3 or C7 option can be used Enter the data as C01 to C12 in the equations Range of numerical values Maximum number of significant digits is 5 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 For the procedure used to set the data see the communication interface user s manual 94 99 040 75611 1 42 1 6 Computation Function and Report Function M1 PM1 Option e Conditions of the remote control terminals D01 to D08 R1 or PM1 option The conditions of the remote input signal can be assig
348. veform Numerical Values or Bar Graph Trend Digital and Bar Graph Screens SCALE ON DIGITAL ON SCALE OFF DIGITAL OFF GROUP 1 Oct 85 2083 f aor sez 0 a Scale ll 5a i e a Numerical display section Auto Switching of Groups When AUTO SCROLL ON is selected the displayed group on the trend digital and bar graph screens can be automatically switched at a specified interval In each screen the displayed group rotates from group 1 to group 4 You can select 5s 10s 20 s 30 s and 1 min for the switch interval For the procedure related to setting the switch interval scroll time see section 6 11 Digital Screen Numerical Display lt Operation Mode gt For details see section 1 4 Display Function Changing the Display 1 Press the DISP ENTER key to display the screen menu 2 Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu 3 Select the sub menu item using the up and down arrow keys Sub menu of the digital screen GROUP 1 Oct 05 2003 09 29 05 poe GROUP 1 to GROUP 4 Displays group 1 to 4 The specified group name is displayed in place of GROUP1 to GROUP4 AUTO SCROLL ON Automatically switches the displayed groups see Explanation AUTO SCROLL OFF Cancels the auto switching of the displayed 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to execute the display To close the menu without switching the screen press the ESC key Changing the Displayed Group Using the A
349. witch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 2 soft key select Color From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display lt gt n EYDIS TAN Red Green Blue B violet Colors of computation channels M1 PM1 option MENU key switch to setting mode gt 5 soft key select Display gt 5 soft key select Math Color From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display D Hath Color CH Color CH Color 31 E 37 E green 32 E Green 38 Lightblue 3 E Blue 3 E Violet 34 E B violet 4 E Gray 3 E Brown 41 E Lime 36 E Orange 42 il Cyan Red Green Blue B violet Next 1 4 Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the Color box of the channel you wish to change A soft key menu used to select the color appears at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the color you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item Repeat steps 1 and 2 to set all the colors you wish Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item Po 6 10 6 6 Changing the Channel Display Color Channel Color e Color The colors are initially set in the following order for every twelve channels e Measurement channels 1 Red 2 Green 3 Blue
350. word Up to 6 alphanumeric characters Key login gt Enter setup Enable or Disable Enable App 19 Appendix 6 List of Parameters App 20 Appendix 6 List of Parameters Save Load Initialize 1 Save settings 2 Load settings 3 Delete 4 Format 5 Initialize 1 2 3 4 5 Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Save Load Initialize gt 1 Save settings T Save Load Initialize gt 2 Load settings Save Load Initialize gt 3 Delete Save Load Initialize gt 4 Format Save Load Initialize gt 5 Initialize gt Kind Clear1 to Clear3 Clear3 Only 1 Initialize is displayed on the models with no storage medium drive 9 Option Setup Mode Option 1 Remote Pulse 2 Report 3 Timer TLOG 1 2 3 lt 1 Remote gt R1 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Remote gt Action No 1 to No 8 None MemoryStart Stop Trigger AlarmACK None TimeAdjust MathStart Stop MathReset Manual sample PaneliLoad Panel2Load Panel3Load Message1 Message2 Message3 Message4 Message5 Message6 Message7 Message8 Snapshot lt 1 Remote Pulse gt PM1 Option Parameter Selectable Range or Selections Initial Value Remote Pulse gt Action No 1 to No 8 None MemoryStart Stop Trigger AlarmACK TimeAdjust MathStart Stop MathReset Manual sample PaneliLoad Panel2Load Panel3Load Message1 Message2 Message3 Message4
351. x 2 Meaning and Syntax of Equations Relational Computation The types of data that can be used in equations are measured data computed data constants K01 to K30 communication interface data C01 to C12 and the remote control terminal conditions D01 to D08 You can specify a computing equation that performs relational computation on a computing element Example 01 LT ABS 02 EXAMPLE 02 LT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GT 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 EQ 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 NE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 GE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 02 LE 03 The computed result will be 1 if the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value in channel 3 otherwise the value will be 0 Logical Computation The computation is perfo
352. y MENU key switch to setting mode gt 2 soft key select Tag Moving average or Filter Alarm delay time From the operation mode use the above keys to open the following setting display GROUP 1 eS cp Oct 05 2003 09 39 56 APDIP P First CH l Last cH for Tag Hoving average Count Off Alarm delay time 10 s Input Clear Copy Setup Procedure 1 Use the arrow keys to move the cursor blue to the item box you wish to change A soft key menu is displayed at the bottom of the display 2 Press the soft key corresponding to the value you wish to select The box for the item you changed turns yellow and the cursor moves to the next item 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 to change the value of all the items you wish to change Note The Tag is set using the pop up window that appears by pressing the Input soft key 4 Press the DISP ENTER key to confirm the changes The boxes for the items you changed turn from yellow to white and the cursor returns to the first item box Tag Names e First CH Last CH Set the target channels The target channels are common with other items on the screen e Tag Enter the tag name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Note For the procedures of setting tag strings of computation channels M1 PM1 option see section 8 1 Assigning Computation Channels and Setting Computing Equations Constants and Tags U9 U09 peAejdsig ay Huibueyg 10 suonesado al 6
353. ymbols are used on the product and in this manual A Handle with care To avoid injury death of personnel or damage to the instrument the operator must refer to the explanation in the manual Protective grounding terminal Ny _ Alternating current For the protection and safe use of the product and the system that integrates the product be sure to follow the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle the product Take special note that if you handle the product in a manner that violate these instructions the protection functionality of the product may be damaged or impaired In such cases We does not guarantee the quality performance function and safety of the product If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product make sure to use parts specified by us Do not modify this product Safety Precautions Power Supply Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Protective Grounding Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so invalidates the protective functions of the instrument and poses a potential shock hazard Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate the instrument if the p

Paperless Recorder User's Manual - pma

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents